WO2022040890A1 - Information indication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Information indication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022040890A1
WO2022040890A1 PCT/CN2020/110920 CN2020110920W WO2022040890A1 WO 2022040890 A1 WO2022040890 A1 WO 2022040890A1 CN 2020110920 W CN2020110920 W CN 2020110920W WO 2022040890 A1 WO2022040890 A1 WO 2022040890A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
srs
srs resource
resources
subsection
target
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/110920
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
苏立焱
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/110920 priority Critical patent/WO2022040890A1/en
Priority to CN202080103452.6A priority patent/CN115989704A/en
Publication of WO2022040890A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022040890A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to an information indication method and device.
  • Multiple input multiple output (multiple input multiple output, MIMO) technology is a core technology in long term evolution (long term evolution) systems and new radio (New Radio, NR) systems.
  • long term evolution long term evolution
  • NR new radio
  • MIMO multiple input multiple output
  • SISO single input single output
  • a single transmitting antenna is used between the transmitting end and the receiving end, the transmitting end will transmit the signal to the receiving end by broadcasting. In this case , the energy of the signal will radiate around, causing the energy of the signal to be wasted.
  • multiple transmitting antennas are used between the transmitting end and the receiving end. The transmitting end can precode the signal before sending the signal, and the precoded signal can be sent to each Receiving end. It can be seen that the MIMO technology performs spatial diversity and multiplexing through multiple transmit antennas, which can improve the reliability and channel gain of data transmission.
  • the uplink physical shared channel can include the following two transmission schemes according to different precoding methods: codebook-based (CB) transmission and non-codebook-based transmission (non-codebook-based, NCB) transmission.
  • CB transmission the same codebook is maintained between the network equipment and the terminal equipment.
  • the network equipment provides the terminal equipment with an indication of the transmission precoding matrix, so that the terminal equipment can select the precoding used for PUSCH transmission from the codebook according to the indication.
  • the precoding resources corresponding to each sounding reference signal (SRS) are calculated by the terminal device, and the network device carries the SRS resource identifier (SRS Resource Indicator) in the downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI).
  • SRS Resource Indicator SRS resource identifier
  • NCB transmission can obtain precoding resources by self-calculation of the terminal equipment, and its adaptability to the terminal equipment in various occasions is relatively good, so it is more and more widely used.
  • a terminal device can only support 4 transmit antennas at most.
  • the SRI indication field also occupies 4 bits at most.
  • the number of transmit antennas supported by the terminal equipment will further increase, which will lead to a corresponding linear increase in the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field.
  • the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field will also increase to 8 bits. This method will greatly increase the transmission burden of DCI, easily cause packet loss, and reduce the transmission reliability of DCI.
  • the SRI indication field sent by the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas (eg, 8 or more transmit antennas).
  • the present application provides an information indication method and apparatus to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field sent by the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas.
  • the present application provides an information indication method, which is applied to a terminal device.
  • the method includes: the terminal device receives first information sent by a network device, and indicates at least one sub-part of a field according to an SRI carried in the first information. , determine the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets, and then use the target SRS resource to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission.
  • the first information includes an SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target sounding reference signal SRS resource to enable the terminal equipment to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS
  • the resource is one or more of N SRS resources used by the terminal device when sending SRS, the N SRS resources are used to obtain K SRS resource subsets, and each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes N SRS resources One or more of the SRS resources.
  • K and N are positive integers, and K ⁇ N.
  • the above design uses a combination of dividing SRS resources and changing the structure of the SRI indication field to indicate the precoding used for uplink transmission, as long as the division method of the N SRS resources is reasonable (for example, the number of SRS resource subsets and the number of each SRS resource are reasonably controlled.
  • the number of SRS resources in the subset even if the terminal device supports more transmit antennas, resulting in a larger value of N, the number of bits in the SRI indication field can be compressed to less than N.
  • this way of grouping indication helps to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field of the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas.
  • the data amount of the DCI carrying the SRI indication field can also be correspondingly reduced, and the reliability of the DCI transmission can be improved.
  • the terminal device before receiving the first information sent by the network device, the terminal device also receives configuration information sent by the network device, where the configuration information is used to indicate that each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets contains SRS resources.
  • the K SRS resource subsets of the terminal device are configured in advance by the network device and notified to the terminal device, which helps the network device and the terminal device to perform non-codebook-based transmission operations based on the unified configuration subsequently, and improves the SRI performance of the network device.
  • the convenience of indicating the target SRS resource in the indication field is provided before receiving the first information sent by the network device.
  • At least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, and the first subsection is used to indicate one SRS resource in the K SRS resource subsets Subset, the second subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in a subset of SRS resources.
  • the terminal device determines the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI indication field, including: The target SRS resource subset is determined centrally, and then the target SRS resource is determined from the target SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
  • the two-level indication structure can be used to accurately indicate the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets.
  • This indication method corresponds to the method of dividing the SRS resources, which helps In the case of dividing SRS resources, it is ensured that the terminal device normally transmits uplink data to the network device.
  • the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets may be in various situations, for example:
  • the transmission performance of the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets is stronger than the preset transmission performance.
  • the network device can select the target SRS resource from the SRS resources with stronger transmission performance, so that the transmission performance of the target SRS resource is better, which helps to improve the efficiency of the uplink transmission of the terminal device.
  • the beam interference probability between the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets and other terminal equipments is less than a preset probability.
  • the target SRS resource selected by the network device also has a high probability of not having beam collision with other terminal devices, so that the terminal device uses the precoding determined by the target SRS resource to perform uplink transmission with better quality.
  • the transmission performance of the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets is stronger than the preset transmission performance, and the beam interference probability between the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets and other terminal equipment is smaller than the preset probability .
  • the network device can select the target SRS resource from the SRS resources with strong transmission performance and no beam collision with other terminal devices, which not only helps to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission of the terminal device, but also improves the quality of uplink transmission.
  • the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same, and the value of K and the SRS resources in each SRS resource subset can be determined by high-level signaling Configured or predefined.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device receives the configuration information sent by the network device, it can also determine the first bit number according to the value of K, and determine the second bit number according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset number.
  • the sum of the first number of bits and the second number of bits is equal to the number of bits of the SRI indication field, the first number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, and the number of second bits is Used by the terminal device to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field.
  • the first number of bits and the second number of bits are obtained by the terminal device itself, rather than being calculated and notified by the network device, which can reduce signaling overhead transmitted by the network device and the terminal device.
  • the first number of bits and the second number of bits may be configured or predefined by high-level signaling, wherein the first number of bits is used to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field , the second number of bits is used to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field.
  • the first bit number and the second bit number corresponding to the terminal device are calculated by the network device and sent to the terminal device, so that the relevant parameters used for the uplink transmission of the terminal device are determined by the network device, thereby helping to improve network performance.
  • Device-to-terminal device management makes uplink transmission more in line with standard procedures.
  • the SRS resource subset includes L SRS resources among the N SRS resources, the number of bits in the SRI indication field is L, and the number of bits in each of the L bits is L.
  • a combination of values constitutes a bit state of L bits, and one or more SRS resources in the L SRS resources correspond to a bit state of L bits, where L is a positive integer smaller than N.
  • the terminal device determines the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI, including: Determine the target SRS resource.
  • one SRS resource subset is formed by selecting L SRS resources from N SRS resources, so that the network device only needs to select the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources, so the number of bits corresponding to the SRI indication field only needs to be It is only necessary to indicate the combined state of the L SRS resources, instead of indicating all the combined states of the N SRS resources, in this way, the number of bits of the SRI indication field can be reduced.
  • the K SRS resource subsets include a first SRS resource subset and a second SRS resource subset, and the first SRS resource subset includes N SRS resource subsets.
  • the second SRS resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where M is a positive integer smaller than N.
  • at least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used to indicate the first subsection One or more SRS resources in a subset of two SRS resources.
  • the terminal device determines the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI indication field, including: the terminal device determines the first target from the first SRS resource subset according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field. SRS resource, and then determine the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field, and finally use the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource as one or more target SRS resources.
  • the network device can select part of the SRS resources from the two SRS resource subsets to form the target SRS resources, instead of selecting all the target SRS resources from only one SRS resource subset, which helps to improve the network equipment. Select the balance of SRS resources.
  • the M SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset are the first M SRS resources in which the N SRS resources are arranged in descending order of transmission performance
  • the NM SRS resources included in the second SRS resource subset The SRS resources are the last NM SRS resources in which the N SRS resources are arranged in descending order of transmission performance.
  • network equipment can schedule SRS resources with weak transmission performance, so that both the ability to schedule SRS resources with strong transmission performance and the ability to avoid interference from other beams can be taken into account, which is convenient for subsequent terminal equipment to transmit with better uplink transmission ability.
  • Uplink data of the beam interference of the terminal equipment can be taken into account, which is convenient for subsequent terminal equipment to transmit with better uplink transmission ability.
  • configuration information is used to indicate M.
  • the terminal device may further divide the N SRS resources into the first SRS resource subset and the second SRS resource subset according to M. In this way, the terminal device can divide N SRS resource subsets in advance according to the manner indicated by the network device, so that when the SRI indication field is subsequently received, the terminal device can accurately determine the target SRS resource.
  • the length of the first sub-part is M bits, and each bit in the M bits corresponds to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, when the value of the first bit in the M bits is the th When the value is one, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the first bit is any one of the M bits.
  • the terminal device determines the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, including: the terminal device sets the bit in the first sub-part as the first value The corresponding SRS resource is used as the first target SRS resource.
  • the terminal device can determine whether each SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset is invoked according to each bit of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field, when the SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset is transmitted When the performance is good, this method helps the terminal device to accurately determine the SRS resource with strong transmission performance used for uplink transmission.
  • the second subsection may include one or more bits, and a combination of the values of each bit in the one or more bits constitutes a bit state of the second subsection, and the configuration information It is also used to indicate the bit status of the second sub-part corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource subset.
  • the terminal device determines the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field, including: A number of SRS resources corresponding to the bit states are selected from the two SRS resource subsets as the second target SRS resources.
  • the terminal device can determine the SRS resources called in the second SRS resource subset according to the bit state of the second sub-part in the SRI indication field.
  • This approach helps the terminal equipment to accurately determine the SRS resources with weak transmission performance used for uplink transmission.
  • the present application provides an information indication method, the method is applied to a network device, and the method includes: the network device first obtains K SRS resource subsets according to N SRS resources used when the terminal device sends a sounding reference signal SRS, The first information is then sent to the terminal device, and after the terminal device determines the precoding used for PUSCH transmission according to the first information, the uplink data that the terminal device uses for PUSCH transmission is received.
  • each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes one or more SRS resources among the N SRS resources
  • the first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field
  • the SRI indication field includes at least one sub
  • the SRI indication field enables the terminal device to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission by indicating the target sounding reference signal SRS resource
  • the target SRS resource is one or more of the N SRS resources used by the terminal device to send the SRS.
  • K and N are positive integers, and K ⁇ N.
  • the above design divides the SRS resources in advance by the network equipment, and uses the changed SRI indication field to indicate the target SRS resources to the terminal equipment, as long as the division method of the N SRS resources is reasonable (for example, the number of SRS resource subsets and each SRS resource are reasonably controlled.
  • the number of SRS resources in the subset even if the terminal device supports more transmit antennas, resulting in a larger value of N, the number of bits in the SRI indication field sent by the network device can be compressed to less than N.
  • this way of grouping indication helps to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field of the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas.
  • the data amount of the DCI carrying the SRI indication field can also be correspondingly reduced, and the reliability of the DCI transmission can be improved.
  • the network device before sending the first information to the terminal device, the network device also obtains K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources, and sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the K SRS resource subsets SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset of the SRS resource subset.
  • the K SRS resource subsets of the terminal device are configured in advance by the network device and notified to the terminal device, which helps the network device and the terminal device to perform non-codebook-based transmission operations based on the unified configuration subsequently, and improves the SRI performance of the network device.
  • the convenience of indicating the target SRS resource in the indication field is configured in advance by the network device and notified to the terminal device, which helps the network device and the terminal device to perform non-codebook-based transmission operations based on the unified configuration subsequently, and improves the SRI performance of the network device.
  • At least one subsection when K is greater than or equal to 2, at least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, and the first subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS from the K SRS resource subsets Resource subset, the second subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset.
  • the two-level indication structure can be used to accurately indicate the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets.
  • This indication method corresponds to the method of dividing the SRS resources, which helps In the case of dividing SRS resources, it is ensured that the terminal device normally transmits uplink data to the network device.
  • the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets may be in various situations, for example:
  • the transmission performance of the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets is stronger than the preset transmission performance.
  • the network device can select the target SRS resource from the SRS resources with stronger transmission performance, so that the transmission performance of the target SRS resource is better, which helps to improve the efficiency of the uplink transmission of the terminal device.
  • the beam interference probability between the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets and other terminal equipments is less than a preset probability.
  • the target SRS resource selected by the network device also has a high probability of not having beam collision with other terminal devices, so that the terminal device uses the precoding determined by the target SRS resource to perform uplink transmission with better quality.
  • the transmission performance of the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets is stronger than the preset transmission performance, and the beam interference probability between the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets and other terminal equipment is smaller than the preset probability .
  • the network device can select the target SRS resource from the SRS resources with strong transmission performance and no beam collision with other terminal devices, which not only helps to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission of the terminal device, but also improves the quality of uplink transmission.
  • the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same.
  • the value of K and the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset can also be configured or pre-defined through high-level signaling.
  • the terminal device can calculate the first number of bits and the first number of bits according to the information.
  • the two-bit number is helpful for the terminal device to obtain the first subsection according to the first bit number and obtain the second subsection according to the second bit number after receiving the SRI indication field.
  • the first bit number and the second bit number are calculated by the terminal device itself, instead of being calculated and transmitted by the network device, which can reduce the signaling overhead of transmission by the network device and the terminal device.
  • the first number of bits and the second number of bits may also be configured or predefined through high-level signaling, where the first number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the number of bits from the SRI indication field.
  • a subsection, the second bit number is used for the terminal device to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field.
  • the first bit number and the second bit number corresponding to the terminal device are configured by high-level signaling or pre-defined, so that the relevant parameters used in the uplink transmission of the terminal device are managed in a unified manner, thereby more conforming to the standard process.
  • the network device obtains K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources, including: the network device selects L SRS resources from the N SRS resources to form an SRS resource subset; one of the L SRS resources or Multiple SRS resources correspond to a bit state of L bits, and the bit state of L bits in the SRI indication field is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources.
  • one SRS resource subset is formed by selecting L SRS resources from N SRS resources, so that the network device only needs to select the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources, so the number of bits corresponding to the SRI indication field only needs to be It is only necessary to indicate the combined state of the L SRS resources, instead of indicating all the combined states of the N SRS resources, in this way, the number of bits of the SRI indication field can be reduced.
  • the configuration information is used to indicate M
  • M is used by the terminal equipment to divide the N SRS resources into the first SRS resource subset and the second SRS resource subset
  • the first One SRS resource subset includes M SRS resources among the N SRS resources
  • the second SRS resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where M is a positive integer less than N.
  • At least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used for The terminal device determines the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset, and the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource constitute the target SRS resource.
  • the network device notifies the terminal device of M, so that the terminal device can obtain 2 SRS resource subsets by dividing according to M in advance, which helps to accurately determine the target SRS resource from the 2 SRS resource subsets when the SRI indication field is subsequently received.
  • this indication method enables the network device to select part of the SRS resources from the two SRS resource subsets respectively to form the target SRS resource, instead of only selecting all the target SRS resources from one SRS resource subset, thereby helping Improve the balance of network equipment selecting SRS resources.
  • the M SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset are the first M SRS resources in which the N SRS resources are arranged in descending order of transmission performance
  • the NM SRS resources included in the second SRS resource subset The SRS resources are the last NM SRS resources in which the N SRS resources are arranged in descending order of transmission performance.
  • network equipment can schedule SRS resources with weak transmission performance, so that both the ability to schedule SRS resources with strong transmission performance and the ability to avoid interference from other beams can be taken into account, which is convenient for subsequent terminal equipment to transmit with better uplink transmission ability.
  • Uplink data of the beam interference of the terminal equipment can be taken into account, which is convenient for subsequent terminal equipment to transmit with better uplink transmission ability.
  • the length of the first sub-part is M bits, and each bit in the M bits corresponds to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, when the value of the first bit in the M bits is the th When the value is one, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the first bit is any one of the M bits.
  • the bit state of the M bits is used by the terminal device to use the SRS resource corresponding to the bit value of the first value in the first subsection as the first target SRS resource.
  • the first subsection can indicate whether each SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset is invoked. When the transmission performance of the SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset is good, this method is helpful for the terminal The device accurately determines the SRS resources with strong transmission performance used for uplink transmission.
  • the second subsection includes one or more bits, and a combination of values of each bit in the one or more bits constitutes a bit state of the second subsection.
  • the configuration information is also used to indicate the bit status of the second subsection corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource subset; the bit status of the second subsection of the SRI indication field is used for The second target SRS resource is selected from the two SRS resource subsets.
  • the bit state of the second sub-part can be used to determine the SRS resources called in the second SRS resource subset, which is helpful when the transmission performance of the SRS resources in the second SRS resource subset is weak.
  • the terminal equipment accurately determines the SRS resources with weak transmission performance used for uplink transmission.
  • the present application provides an information indicating device, the device may be a terminal device, and the device includes:
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive first information sent by the network device, where the first information may include a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field.
  • the SRI indication field may include at least one sub-section, and the SRI indication field enables the terminal device to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission by indicating the target sounding reference signal SRS resource.
  • the target SRS resource indicated by the SRI indication field can be one or more of the N SRS resources used by the terminal device when sending SRS, and the N SRS resources are used to obtain K SRS resource subsets.
  • Each SRS resource subset may include one or more SRS resources among the N SRS resources. Among them, K and N are positive integers, and K ⁇ N;
  • the processing unit is configured to determine the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI indication field, and use the target SRS resource to determine the precoding used by the terminal equipment for PUSCH transmission.
  • the transceiver unit before receiving the first information sent by the network device, the transceiver unit further receives configuration information sent by the network device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the information contained in each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets SRS resources.
  • At least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, and the first subsection is used to indicate one SRS resource subset in the K SRS resource subsets , and the second sub-part is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in a subset of SRS resources.
  • the processing unit may first determine the target SRS resource subset from the K SRS resource subsets according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, and then determine the target SRS resource subset from the target SRS resource subset according to the second sub-section of the SRI indication field Determine the target SRS resource.
  • the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same, and the value of K may be configured or predefined by high-level signaling.
  • the processing unit may also determine the first number of bits according to the value of K, and determine the first number of bits according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset. Two bits. Wherein, the first number of bits is used to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, the second number of bits is used to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field, the first number of bits and the second number of bits are The sum of the numbers is equal to the number of bits in the SRI indication field.
  • the processing unit may also be configured by high-level signaling or predefine the first number of bits and the second number of bits, where the first number of bits is used to determine the first number of bits from the SRI indication field Subpart, the second number of bits is used to determine the second subpart from the SRI indication field.
  • the SRS resource subset can include L SRS resources among the N SRS resources, L is a positive integer less than N, the number of bits of the SRI indication field is L, and L A combination of values of each of the bits constitutes a bit state of the L bits, and one or more SRS resources in the L SRS resources corresponds to a bit state of the L bits.
  • the processing unit may determine the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources according to the bit state of the L bits of the SRI indication field.
  • the K SRS resource subsets may include a first SRS resource subset and a second SRS resource subset, and the first SRS resource subset includes M of the N SRS resources
  • the second SRS resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where M is a positive integer smaller than N.
  • at least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used to indicate the second SRS One or more SRS resources in a subset of resources.
  • the processing unit may determine the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, and determine the first target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field A second target SRS resource is determined, and then the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource are used as one or more target SRS resources.
  • configuration information may be used to indicate M.
  • the processing unit may further divide the N SRS resources into the first SRS resource subset and the second SRS resource subset according to M.
  • the length of the first sub-part is M bits, and each bit in the M bits may correspond to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, when the value of the first bit in the M bits is the first When the value is one, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, where the first bit can be any one of the M bits.
  • the processing unit may use the SRS resource corresponding to the bit whose value is the first value in the first subsection as the first target SRS resource.
  • the second subsection may include one or more bits, and a combination of the values of each of the one or more bits constitutes a bit state of the second subsection.
  • the configuration information may further indicate the bit status of the second sub-part corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource sub-set.
  • the processing unit may select the number of SRS resources corresponding to the bit states from the second SRS resource subset as the second target SRS resources according to the bit states of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
  • the present application provides an information indicating device, the device may be a network device, and the device includes:
  • the processing unit is configured to obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources used when the terminal equipment sends the sounding reference signal SRS.
  • each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets may include one or more SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where K and N are positive integers, and K ⁇ N;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send the first information to the terminal device, and receive the uplink data that the terminal device uses for PUSCH transmission using precoding.
  • the first information may include a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, the SRI indication field may include at least one sub-section, and the SRI indication field may indicate the target SRS resource to enable the terminal device to determine the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission.
  • the target SRS resource may be one or more of N SRS resources.
  • the transceiver unit may also send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets .
  • At least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, and the first subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS from the K SRS resource subsets Resource subset, the second subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset.
  • the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same.
  • the processing unit may also configure or pre-define the value of K through high-level signaling, so that the terminal device can determine the first number of bits according to the value of K, and according to the SRS included in each SRS resource subset
  • the number of resources determines the second number of bits, the first number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, and the second number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field. part.
  • the processing unit may also configure or predefine the first bit number and the second bit number through high-level signaling, and the first bit number is used by the terminal device to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, The second number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field.
  • the number of bits in the SRI indication field can be L, where L is a positive integer less than N, and a combination of the values of each of the L bits can constitute L A bit state of a bit.
  • the processing unit may select L SRS resources from the N SRS resources to form a subset of SRS resources, and one or more SRS resources in the L SRS resources may correspond to a bit state of L bits, so that , the bit status of the L bits of the SRI indication field can be used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources.
  • the configuration information can be used to indicate M, where M is used by the terminal equipment to divide N SRS resources into the first SRS resource subset and the second SRS resource subset, the first The SRS resource subset includes M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, and the second SRS resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where M is a positive integer less than N.
  • At least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used for The terminal device determines the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset, and the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource constitute the target SRS resource.
  • the length of the first subsection may be M bits, and each bit in the M bits may correspond to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, when the value of the first bit in the M bits is When the value is the first, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the first bit is any one of the M bits.
  • the bit state of the M bits may be used by the terminal device to use the SRS resource corresponding to the bit value of the first value in the first subsection as the first target SRS resource.
  • the second subsection may include one or more bits, and a combination of the values of each of the one or more bits constitutes a bit state of the second subsection.
  • the configuration information is also used to indicate the bit state of the second sub-part corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource subset, and the bit state of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field is used for the terminal device to select from the first sub-part.
  • the second target SRS resource is selected from the two SRS resource subsets.
  • the present application provides an information indicating device, which may include a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface may be used to receive and transmit signals from other communication devices other than the information indicating device of the third aspect.
  • the processor can implement the method according to any one of the first aspect through logic circuits or executing code instructions.
  • the present application provides an information indicating device, which may include a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the information indicating device in the fourth aspect and transmit to the information indicating device.
  • the processor may send signals from the processor to other communication devices than the information indicating device of the fourth aspect, and the processor may implement the method according to any one of the second aspect through logic circuits or executing code instructions.
  • the present application provides an information indicating device, the device may include a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for executing the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device executes the above-mentioned The method of any one of the first aspects.
  • the present application provides an information indicating device, the device may include a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for executing the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device executes as above The method of any one of the second aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of the foregoing first aspects is implemented.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of the foregoing second aspects is implemented.
  • the present application provides a chip, which may include a processor and an interface, where the processor is configured to read an instruction through the interface to execute the information indication method according to any one of the above-mentioned first aspect.
  • the present application provides a chip, which may include a processor and an interface, where the processor is configured to read an instruction through the interface to execute the information indicating method according to any one of the second aspect above.
  • the present application provides a computer program product, which is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method described in any of the above-mentioned first aspect , or perform any method described in the second aspect above.
  • the present application provides a system, the system may include a terminal device and a network device, wherein the terminal device may be used to execute the first aspect or any one of the methods in the first aspect, and the network device may be used to Perform any method of the second aspect or the second aspect above.
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a system architecture of a communication system to which an embodiment of the present application is applicable;
  • Fig. 3 exemplarily shows a non-codebook-based uplink transmission sequence diagram
  • FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application
  • FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application
  • FIG. 6 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of an information indicating device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of another information indicating device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of another information indicating apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a system architecture of a communication system 100 to which the embodiments of the present application are applied.
  • the system architecture shown in FIG. 1 includes a network device 110 and at least one terminal device, such as terminal device 101 , terminal device 102 , terminal device 103 , terminal device 104 , terminal device 105 , and terminal device 106 .
  • terminal device 101 terminal device 101
  • terminal device 102 terminal device 103
  • terminal device 104 terminal device 105
  • terminal device 106 terminal device
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of network devices and the number of terminal devices in the system architecture, and the system architecture to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable may include, in addition to network devices and terminal devices, other devices, such as Core network equipment, wireless relay equipment, wireless backhaul equipment, etc., are also not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application may integrate all functions in an independent physical device, or may distribute the functions on multiple independent physical devices, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be connected to the network device in a wireless manner.
  • the terminal device 105, the terminal device 104 and the terminal device 106 shown in FIG. 1 may also constitute a communication system.
  • the terminal device 105 is equivalent to a network device and can implement the operations performed by the network device in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the terminal device 104 and the terminal device 106 are equivalent to terminal devices and can implement the implementation of the present application. The operation performed by the terminal device in the example.
  • the communication system in this embodiment of the present application may refer to various communication systems, such as: 5G (or called new radio (NR)) communication system, 6G communication system, long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE for short) system, Global system of mobile communication (GSM) system, code division multiple access (CDMA) system, wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) general packet radio service ( general packet radio service (GPRS) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS) ), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX for short) communication system, etc., of course, it can also be a communication system in other unlicensed frequency bands, which is not limited.
  • 5G or called new radio (NR) communication system
  • 6G communication system long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE for short) system
  • GSM Global system of mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • the terminal device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, for example, may include a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal equipment may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device (D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle to everything (V2X) terminal equipment , Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber) station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user Agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • M2M/MTC Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
  • IoT Internet of things
  • subscriber unit subscriber unit
  • subscriber station subscriber station
  • mobile station mobile station
  • remote station remote station
  • access point access point
  • AP remote terminal
  • remote terminal remote terminal
  • these may include mobile telephones (or "cellular" telephones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer-embedded mobile devices, and the like.
  • mobile telephones or "cellular" telephones
  • PCS personal communication service
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • constrained devices such as devices with lower power consumption, or devices with limited storage capacity, or devices with limited computing power, etc.
  • it includes information sensing devices such as barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), and laser scanners.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • GPS global positioning system
  • the network devices in the embodiments of the present application may include multiple types, for example, including access network (access network, AN) devices, such as base stations (eg, access points), which may refer to the access network through an air interface through one or more A device that communicates with a wireless terminal device in a cell.
  • the base station may be used to convert received air frames to and from Internet Protocol (IP) packets and act as a router between the terminal device and the rest of the access network, which may include the IP network.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • it includes a road side unit (road side unit, RSB).
  • the RSB may be a fixed infrastructure entity supporting V2X applications, and may exchange messages with other entities supporting V2X applications.
  • the network device can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
  • the network equipment may include an LTE system or an evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A), or may also include fifth generation mobile
  • the next generation node B ( gNB ) in the new radio (NR) system of the communication technology (the 5th generation, 5G) may also include the cloud radio access network (Cloud RAN)
  • a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in the system are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • MIMO technology can exponentially increase system capacity through spatial multiplexing of multiple antennas, but this is not the case in practice.
  • the capacity of the 2*2MIMO system is actually the capacity of the SISO system that is less than twice the theoretical system capacity of the 2*2MIMO, that is, the capacity of the 2SISO system.
  • This is caused by the corresponding increase in the inter-channel influence as the system capacity increases, and the inter-channel influence is mainly caused by the correlation of the channels in the channel matrix. Therefore, when evaluating the channel matrix at the receiving end, it is also necessary to perform an operation to eliminate the influence between channels.
  • the receiving end needs to process and evaluate each channel in a balanced manner.
  • the receiving end only needs to process and evaluate one channel in a balanced manner
  • the receiving end needs to process and evaluate 4 channels in a balanced manner.
  • this method not only increases the difficulty of signal processing by the receiver, but also increases the system overhead because the receiver needs to feed back evaluation results of multiple channel correlations to the transmitter.
  • precoding In order to solve the above problems, precoding (Precoding) came into being.
  • the purpose of precoding is to maximize the capacity of the MIMO system, reduce the difficulty of signal processing at the receiving end, and reduce system overhead.
  • Precoding uses the channel state at the transmitter to dynamically control the power and phase of the signal. By changing the distribution of signal energy in space, the energy of some specific locations becomes stronger, and the signal transmission performance and system capacity of the transmitter at that location are improved. , so that the receiver can receive the "pure" signal sent by the transmitter without interference from other transmitters.
  • the transmitting end performs preprocessing first and then sends it to the receiving end, so that the receiving end does not need to perform the above-mentioned complex process of equalizing processing to evaluate each channel, and does not need to feed back the evaluation results of multiple channel correlations to the transmitting end. Therefore, the difficulty and system overhead of signal processing at the receiving end can also be reduced.
  • uplink transmission can be mainly divided into two types: CB transmission and NCB transmission.
  • the precoding used by the terminal equipment in the CB transmission is notified to the terminal equipment by the network equipment through the codebook, while the precoding used in the NCB transmission is calculated by the terminal equipment itself.
  • NCB transmission The solution in this application is mainly applied to NCB transmission.
  • the specific implementation process of NCB transmission is first introduced below.
  • FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a scenario of NCB transmission
  • FIG. 3 exemplarily shows a timing sequence diagram of NCB transmission.
  • the non-codebook-based uplink transmission process includes:
  • Step 301 the network device configures N SRS resources based on NCB transmission for the terminal device.
  • the network device may configure one or more SRS resource sets for the terminal device, and the one or more SRS resource sets include but are not limited to: a beam management set, a codebook set, a non-codebook set, and Antenna switching set.
  • each SRS resource set may include at least one SRS resource, and the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource set may be determined according to the capability of the terminal device. For example, when the number of antennas supported by the terminal device is more, each The number of SRS resources included in the SRS resource set may be larger.
  • the SRS resources in each SRS resource set may correspond to different purposes, for example, the SRS resources in the beam management set are used to perform uplink beam training, and the SRS resources in the codebook set are used to perform codebook-based channel
  • the state information acquisition and the SRS resources in the non-codebook set are used to perform non-codebook-based channel state information acquisition, and the SRS resources in the antenna switching set are used to perform the antenna switching function.
  • the information indication method in this application is applicable to each SRS resource in the non-codebook set. Therefore, for the convenience of description, the SRS resources in the non-codebook set are directly referred to as SRS resources in the following embodiments of the present application. That is to say, "SRS resources" appearing in the following can be replaced with "SRS resources in the non-codebook set”.
  • the network device configures N SRS resources for the terminal device, which may specifically refer to that the network device configures the terminal device with N uplink resources for transmitting SRS, such as time domain resources and frequency domain resources.
  • N can be any positive integer less than or equal to the number of transmit antennas of the terminal device.
  • the naming of the N SRS resources can be set by those skilled in the art according to experience, for example, a currently most commonly used naming manner is: naming the N SRS resources as SRS 0 to SRS N-1.
  • Step 302 the network device sends a downlink reference signal (downlink-reference signal, DL-RS) to the terminal device.
  • a downlink reference signal downlink-reference signal, DL-RS
  • the DL-RS may refer to a cell-specific reference signal or a channel state information reference signal (channel state information, CSI-RS).
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • These DL-RSs are transmitted in the entire frequency band and are independent of resource blocks (RBs) allocated to terminal devices, and can be used for CSI measurement.
  • Step 303 the terminal device performs downlink channel measurement on the received DL-RS to obtain the CSI of the downlink channel.
  • the terminal device may estimate the channel state information between the transmit antenna of the network device and the receive antenna of the terminal device according to the DL-RS, so as to calculate the relevant parameters of the downlink channel.
  • the relevant parameters may include, but are not limited to, channel quality indication (channel quality information, CQI), reference signal reception power (reference signal reception power, RSRP), channel state information (channel state information, CSI), and the like.
  • Step 304 the terminal device calculates the beams (beams) used for N uplink transmissions according to the CSI of the downlink channel.
  • the CSI of the downlink channel and the CSI of the uplink channel usually contain a large amount of the same or similar information.
  • the receiving antenna of the uplink channel may correspond to the transmitting antenna of the downlink channel
  • the transmitting antenna of the uplink channel may correspond to the receiving antenna of the downlink channel
  • the antenna, the uplink channel and the downlink channel are located at the same frequency, and there is reciprocity between the uplink channel and the downlink channel.
  • the channel elements in the covariance matrix of the uplink channel are equivalent to the channel elements in the covariance matrix of the downlink channel, except that these channel elements are respectively arranged in the covariance matrix of the uplink channel and the covariance matrix of the downlink channel according to the corresponding relationship of the antenna.
  • the two covariance matrices exhibit a transposed relationship.
  • the terminal device can first determine the covariance matrix of the downlink channel from the CSI of the downlink channel, and then accurately obtain the covariance matrix of the uplink channel according to the above-mentioned transposition relationship. Further, the terminal device can perform singular value decomposition on the covariance matrix of the uplink channel according to the following formula (1.1):
  • each parameter in formula (1.1) corresponds to:
  • H U is the covariance matrix of the uplink channel
  • U and V are unitary matrices, and the first N columns of V correspond to the beams used by N uplink transmissions;
  • is a generalized diagonal matrix, each diagonal element of ⁇ is a positive value, and each diagonal element is arranged in order from large to small.
  • the diagonal elements of the rth row and the rth column of ⁇ are larger than the diagonal elements of the r+1th row and the r+1th column, and r is a positive integer greater than 0.
  • the first N diagonal elements of ⁇ correspond to the first N columns of V, that is, N beams, and the N beams are named after the resources occupied during transmission.
  • the N SRS resources are named as When SRS 0 ⁇ SRS N-1, the N beams are named beam 0 ⁇ beam N-1 correspondingly.
  • the diagonal element of ⁇ is larger, it means that the terminal equipment has better transmission performance using the beam corresponding to the diagonal element under the premise of no interference.
  • the first N diagonal elements of ⁇ gradually decrease, the transmission performance of the N beams corresponding to the first N diagonal elements also gradually deteriorates.
  • Step 305 the terminal device precodes the SRS using N beams, and sends the precoded SRS to the network device.
  • the network device may schedule multiple terminal devices on the same time-frequency resource, resulting in possible collisions between beams ( That is, the signal transmitted according to the beam may be interfered by other transmitted signals).
  • the terminal device does not know the real collision situation between the beams, so it cannot determine which beam or beams in beam 0 to beam N-1 are the best, and thus cannot determine which SRS resources it wants to call. . Therefore, the terminal device also needs to use N beams to precode the SRS before sending it to the network device, wait for receiving an instruction sent by the network device, and determine the precoding used for subsequent uplink data transmission according to the instruction.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports multiple transmit antennas, the terminal device can transmit one-stream or multi-stream data at the same time, and this stream or multi-stream data is obtained by dividing the data to be transmitted (for example, SRS), and each stream of data corresponds to one Beam, the beam corresponding to each stream of data is used to weight the stream data (called beamforming or beamforming, beamforming), and one or more beams corresponding to one stream or multiple streams of data constitute the precoding for this transmission.
  • SRS data to be transmitted
  • Beam the beam corresponding to each stream of data
  • beamforming beamforming
  • the precoding for this transmission is shown in the following formula (1.2):
  • the three rows of data [1, 1], [0, 1] and [1, 0] in the precoding represent the three transmit antennas of the terminal device respectively, and the two columns of data [1, 0, 1] T and [1] , 1, 0] T represent 2 beams respectively.
  • the first beam [1, 0, 1] T is used to instruct the terminal device to send the first stream data x0 of SRS through the first transmit antenna and the third transmit antenna
  • the second beam [1, 1, 0] T is used to instruct the terminal device to send the second stream data x1 of the SRS through the first transmit antenna and the second transmit antenna.
  • the terminal device when using N beams to precode SRS, for each beam, the terminal device may first use the beam to weight the corresponding data stream, and then send the weighted data stream according to the SRS resource corresponding to the beam. to network equipment.
  • multi-stream transmission can increase the data volume of one uplink transmission, and improve the spectral efficiency and peak rate of uplink transmission.
  • Step 306 the network equipment performs channel estimation according to the precoded SRS, and calculates the uplink transmission rate when the terminal equipment uses each SRS resource, and determines the target according to the channel estimation result and the uplink transmission rates corresponding to the N SRS resources respectively.
  • SRS resources SRS resources.
  • the information used by the network device to determine one or more target SRS resources may include but not limited to channel estimation results and uplink transmission rates.
  • the network device may first exclude the beams that may collide from the N beams of the current terminal device according to the beams corresponding to the SRS resources used by other terminal devices for uplink transmission, and then One or more beams with a better uplink transmission rate are selected from the beams without collision, and one or more SRS resources corresponding to the one or more beams are used as the target SRS resources. In this way, the possibility of beam collision between the subsequent uplink transmission of the terminal device and the uplink transmission of other terminal devices is less, which helps to improve the quality of signal transmission. Moreover, the terminal device can also transmit uplink data at a higher transmission rate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • Step 307 the network device sends downlink control information (DCI) to the terminal device, the DCI carries an SRI indication field, and the SRI indication field is used to indicate the target SRS resource.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • each combination of N SRS resources may correspond to a bit state of the SRI indication field.
  • the SRI indication field can include 2 bits, and the bit states of these 2 bits are arranged in sequence according to the combination of the 2 SRS resources, as shown in the following table 1 shows:
  • the SRI indication field indicates that 1 SRS resource can include 2 cases, namely SRS 0 or SRS 1
  • the SRI indication field indicates that 2 SRS resources can include 1 case, namely SRS 0 and SRS 1, these 3 kinds
  • the cases correspond to bit states 00, 01, and 10 in turn.
  • the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field can be determined according to the following formula (1.3):
  • each parameter in formula (1.3) is:
  • L max is the maximum number of scheduling layers, which is used to limit the maximum number of data streams that the terminal device can transmit at the same time.
  • the value of L max can be configured by the network device to the terminal device through high-layer signaling or predefined, and generally does not exceed N, which can be specifically determined according to the processing capability of the hardware device of the terminal device. Considering that the current hardware processing capability of the terminal device can only support data transmission of 4 streams or less, the following embodiments of the present application all take the terminal device transmitting data of 4 streams at most as an example for introduction.
  • formula (1.3) is used to add up the number of possible combinations of SRS resources that are not more than min ⁇ L max ,N ⁇ selected from N SRS resources, and make the bits occupied by the SRI indication field
  • the number of bits is the minimum value of the bit state greater than or equal to the sum.
  • the SRI indication field can indicate any situation in which the terminal equipment uses no more than N SRS resources for uplink transmission.
  • Step 308 the terminal equipment precodes uplink data using the beam corresponding to the target SRS resource indicated by the SRI indication field.
  • Step 309 the terminal device sends the precoded uplink data to the network device.
  • the terminal device may directly use the beam corresponding to the target SRS resource to precode uplink data.
  • the terminal device can first divide the uplink data into sub-data of two or more streams, and then use the two or more target SRS resources respectively The sub-data of two streams or more are weighted, and finally the weighted sub-data of each stream is sent out according to the corresponding target SRS resource.
  • the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field is also exactly equal to the number of transmit antennas.
  • the terminal equipment can only support 4 or less transmit antennas, so the corresponding SRI indication field occupies at most 4 bits.
  • the terminal equipment will support 8 or more transmit antennas in the future, which will lead to a corresponding increase in the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field to 8 bits or more, thus greatly increasing
  • the transmission burden of the DCI reduces the transmission reliability of the DCI. Therefore, the evolution of the 5G standard must solve the problem that the SRI indication field is too large for terminal equipment that supports more transmit antennas represented by 8 transmit antennas.
  • L max ⁇ N the number of transmit antennas, so, according to formula (1.3), since min ⁇ L max ,N ⁇ is L max (less than the transmit antenna number), so the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field can be smaller than the number of transmit antennas.
  • this implementation actually reduces the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field at the expense of the uplink transmission capability of the terminal device. For example, when the SRI indication field corresponding to a terminal device supporting 8 transmit antennas needs to be compressed to less than 5 bits, this embodiment will configure N to be 8, and configure L max to be less than or equal to 5.
  • the terminal equipment at this stage can transmit at most 4 streams of data
  • the configuration L max is less than 4 (for example, 1)
  • the terminal equipment can only select less than 4 SRS resources from the 8 SRS resources each time to obtain the precoding for uplink transmission , so the number of data streams divided by the uplink transmission is less than 4.
  • This transmission method does not fully utilize the best processing capability of the terminal device, which will limit the peak rate of the terminal device’s uplink transmission, which is not conducive to the timely communication between the terminal device and the network device. sex.
  • the configuration L max is greater than or equal to 4 (for example, 4)
  • the terminal equipment will select the SRS resources corresponding to the 4 beams with the strongest transmission capability from the 8 SRS resources each time to obtain the precoding of the uplink transmission.
  • L max N ⁇ the number of transmit antennas, so, according to formula (1.3), since min ⁇ L max ,N ⁇ is N or L max (less than the number of transmit antennas) , so the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field may also be smaller than the number of transmit antennas.
  • this method actually reduces the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field at the expense of reducing the beams available to the terminal device. For example, when it is necessary to compress the SRI indication field corresponding to a terminal device supporting 8 transmit antennas to less than 5 bits, this embodiment will configure N and L max to be 5. In this case, the terminal device can only provide 5 The SRS resource corresponding to the beam with better transmission performance can be selected by the network device.
  • the network device wants to schedule the terminal device to transmit 4-stream data, and the beam with 2 SRS resources in the 5 SRS resources exists with the signal sent by another terminal device If there is a high probability of collision, then: in order to maintain the upstream transmission capability of the terminal device, the network device can forcibly schedule 4 streams of data, which will cause at least 1 stream of data scheduled by the terminal device to collide with signals sent by other terminal devices, resulting in the terminal device being unable to avoid it. Beam interference of other terminal equipment; in order to avoid beam interference, network equipment can only schedule the remaining 3 streams of data, which will reduce the uplink transmission capability of the terminal equipment. It can be seen from this that this embodiment cannot simultaneously improve the uplink transmission capability of the terminal device and the ability to avoid beam interference of other terminal devices.
  • the present application provides an information indication method, which is used to improve the uplink transmission of the terminal equipment when the terminal equipment supporting more transmit antennas represented by 8 transmit antennas faces the problem that the SRI indication field is too large. capability and the ability to avoid beam interference from other terminal equipment.
  • the network device may be the network device 100 in FIG. 1 , or an information indicating device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, and of course other information indicating devices, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the terminal device may be the terminal device in FIG. 1 , or an information indicating device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device to implement the method, and of course other information indicating devices, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • “And/or”, which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are an “or” relationship.
  • At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s). For example, at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
  • ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree.
  • first configuration information and the second configuration information are only for distinguishing different information, and do not indicate the difference in priority or importance of the two information.
  • FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application, and the method may be executed by a terminal device and a network device, such as the terminal device and the network device shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the method includes:
  • Step 401 The network device sends first information to the terminal device, where the first information includes an SRI indication field, and the SIR indication field includes at least one sub-part.
  • the first information may be carried in the DCI.
  • the network device may determine the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field according to the type of the terminal device. For example, if the terminal device is of a type whose number of transmit antennas is greater than or equal to 8, the number of bits in the SRI indication field is less than N. In this case, the network device can first obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources of the terminal device, and then modify the indication mode of the SRI indication field, so that the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the At least one subsection to indicate the target SRS resource in the K subsets of SRS resources.
  • each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets may include one or more SRS resources.
  • the number of SRS resources included in the intersection of any two SRS resource subsets in the K SRS resource subsets may be 0, or may be a positive integer greater than 0 and less than N.
  • the number of SRS resources included in the union of the K SRS resource subsets may be N, or may be a positive integer greater than 0 and less than N, which is not specifically limited.
  • Step 402 the terminal device determines the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI indication field, and uses the beam corresponding to the target SRS resource to precode the uplink data.
  • K may be a positive integer smaller than N.
  • the network device can select SRS resources whose number is less than or equal to the maximum number of bits to be compressed from the N SRS resources, put them in the subset of SRS resources, and then use the SRI indication field of the SRS resources. at least one subsection is indicated. In this way, since the number of SRS resources in the one SRS resource subset is less than N, the number of bits of the SRI indication field can also be less than N. or,
  • the network device may divide N SRS resources into at least two SRS resource subsets, or may divide L SRS resources less than N into at least two SRS resource subsets and indicates the target SRS resource from at least two subsets of SRS resources using at least one subsection of the SRI indication field. In this way, as long as the N SRS resources are appropriately grouped, the number of bits in the SRI indication field can be compressed to less than N.
  • Step 403 the terminal device sends the precoded uplink data to the network device.
  • This embodiment of the present application uses a combination of dividing SRS resources and changing the structure of the SRI indication field to indicate the precoding used for uplink transmission, as long as the division method of the N SRS resources is reasonable (for example, the number of SRS resource subsets and each The number of SRS resources in the SRS resource subset), then even if the terminal device supports more transmit antennas, resulting in a larger value of N, the number of bits in the SRI indication field can be compressed to less than N.
  • this way of grouping indication helps to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field of the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas.
  • the data amount of the DCI carrying the SRI indication field can also be correspondingly reduced, and the reliability of the DCI transmission can be improved.
  • FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application, and the method may be executed by a terminal device and a network device, such as the terminal device and the network device shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the method includes:
  • Step 501 the network device obtains K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources of the terminal device.
  • K is a positive integer.
  • the network device may obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the transmission performance of the N SRS resources.
  • the N SRS resources are named as SRS 0 to SRS N-1
  • the transmission performance of the N beams beam 0 to beam N-1 corresponding to the N SRS resources gradually decreases ( For the convenience of description, it is called that the transmission performance of the N SRS resources gradually decreases).
  • the L SRS resources with better transmission performance are divided into K SRS resource subsets.
  • L can be any positive integer less than or equal to N.
  • the SRS resources in each SRS resource subset may or may not be repeated, and the number of SRS resources in each SRS resource subset may be the same or different, which is not specifically limited.
  • the network device may set each SRS resource subset to include the same number of SRS resources.
  • the L SRS resources can be equally divided into K SRS resource subsets, each SRS resource subset includes L/K SRS resources, and K Duplicate SRS resources may not be included in the subset of SRS resources.
  • the value of L is a non-integer multiple of K, the corresponding one or more SRS resources with the best transmission performance among the L SRS resources may be repeatedly divided into at least two SRS resource subsets.
  • the N SRS resources include SRS 0 to SRS 7
  • the beam transmission performance of SRS 0 is the best
  • the beam transmission performance of SRS 1 is second
  • the beam transmission performance of SRS 7 is the worst.
  • Seven SRS resources (SRS 0 to SRS 6) with the best transmission performance are selected from 0 to SRS 7 and divided into 2 SRS resource subsets, then the SRS resource subsets shown in Table 2 can be divided into:
  • SRS resource subset 1 ⁇ SRS0, SRS1, SRS3, SRS5 ⁇ SRS resource subset 2 ⁇ SRS0, SRS2, SRS4, SRS6 ⁇
  • the network device can select SRS 0 to SRS 6 from SRS 0 to SRS 6. Then select an SRS 0 with the best transmission performance as the repeatedly divided SRS resource.
  • SRS resource subset 1 and SRS resource subset 2 both include SRS 0 with the best transmission performance, and neither include SRS 7 with the worst transmission performance.
  • K SRS resource subsets are obtained from the interference conditions of the N beams, where the interference conditions of the N beams can be determined a priori by the network device according to the historical communication with each terminal device. If one or some beams are likely to be interfered by signals sent by other terminal equipment, the SRS resources corresponding to this beam or these beams may not be considered, and only the SRS resources corresponding to other beams except this beam or these beams are divided. into K subsets of SRS resources.
  • the network equipment can only detect SRS 0, SRS 1, SRS 2, and SRS 4.
  • SRS 6, SRS 7 are divided, when divided into 2 SRS resource subsets, for example, the first resource subset may include ⁇ SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 6 ⁇ , and the second resource subset may include ⁇ SRS 1.
  • SRS 4, SRS 7 ⁇ When divided into 1 SRS resource subset, for example, the resource subset may include ⁇ SRS 0, SRS 1, SRS 2, SRS 4, SRS 6, SRS 7 ⁇ .
  • K SRS resource subsets can also be synthesized according to the transmission performance of the N SRS resources and the interference conditions of the N beams corresponding to the N SRS resources.
  • the A subset of resources may include ⁇ SRS 0, SRS 1, SRS 2, SRS 4, SRS 6 ⁇ .
  • the N SRS resources are divided into several SRS resource subsets, and how many SRS resources each resource subset includes may be determined according to the number of bits that want to compress the SRI indication field. For details on how to determine the number of SRS resource subsets and the number of SRS resources in each SRS resource subset according to the number of bits compressed in the SRI indication field, reference may be made to the description in step 502, which will not be introduced here.
  • Step 502 The network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the SRS resources in the K SRS resource subsets.
  • the first configuration information may be carried in one or more of system information, downlink control information, media access layer information, and high-layer signaling.
  • the SRI indication field may include a first subsection and a second subsection
  • the first configuration information may also be used to indicate the length of the first subsection in the SRI indication field (ie, the first bit number) and/or the length of the second subsection (ie the second number of bits).
  • the length of the first subsection refers to the number of bits occupied by the first subsection, and the first subsection is used to indicate the target SRS resource subset from the K SRS resources, so the bit state corresponding to the first subsection The number of needs to be greater than or equal to the number of SRS resource subsets (ie, K).
  • the length of the first sub-part may be 1 bit, and when the bit status of this 1 bit is 0, it indicates SRS resource subset 1 , when the bit status of this 1 bit is 1, it indicates SRS resource subset 2.
  • the length of the second subsection refers to the number of bits occupied by the second subsection, and the second subsection is used to indicate the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset, so the corresponding bit status of the second subsection is The number needs to be greater than or equal to the total number of possible combinations of SRS resources in the subset of SRS resources. In the case where K is greater than or equal to 2, if each SRS resource subset includes the same number of SRS resources, the number of bit states corresponding to the second sub-part can be determined according to the number of SRS resources included in one SRS resource subset Sure.
  • the lengths of the second subsections may also be different. Two possible ways to determine the length of the second subsection are exemplified below:
  • the second subsection indicates the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset in a bitmap manner.
  • the length of the second subsection may be the same as the number of SRS resources in the target SRS resource subset. same.
  • the length of the second subsection may be configured as 4 bits. These 4 bits correspond to 4 SRS resources respectively, and the value of each bit is used to indicate whether the SRS resource corresponding to the bit is the target SRS resource. For example, when the value of a certain bit is 1, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the bit is the target SRS resource, and when the value of a certain bit is 0, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the bit is not the target SRS resource.
  • the second subsection indicates the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset according to the combination of bit states.
  • the length of the second subsection can be calculated according to the following formula (2.1):
  • n is the length of the second subsection
  • l is the number of SRS resources in the target SRS resource subset.
  • 1 in the formula (2.1) may also refer to the maximum number of SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets.
  • the target SRS resource subset is When the set is any SRS resource subset in the K SRS resource subsets, the length of the second subpart can be used to indicate the target SRS resource in the target SRS resource subset, and the length of the second subpart is sufficient.
  • the following takes the SRS resource subset shown in Table 2 as an example to introduce the implementation of the second sub-part indicating the target SRS resource in the target SRS resource subset according to the combination of bit states.
  • both SRS resource subset 1 and SRS resource subset 2 include 4 SRS resources, and the 4 SRS resources have the following 15 possible combinations
  • the bits corresponding to the length of the second subpart The number of states is not less than 15, and the length of the second sub-part calculated according to formula (2.1) is 4 bits.
  • the bit states of these 4 bits may be used to indicate:
  • the target SRS resource subset is SRS resource subset 1
  • the target SRS resource can be SRS0, SRS1, SRS3 or SRS5;
  • the target SRS resource subset is SRS resource subset 1
  • the two target SRS resources can be SRS 0 and SRS 1 , SRS 0 and SRS 3, SRS 0 and SRS 5, SRS 1 and SRS 3, SRS 1 and SRS 5, or SRS 3 and SRS 5;
  • the 3 target SRS resources can be SRS 0, SRS 1 and SRS 3, SRS 0, SRS 1 and SRS5, SRS 0, SRS 3 and SRS 5, SRS 1, SRS 3 and SRS 5;
  • the target SRS resource subset is SRS resource subset 1
  • the 4 target SRS resources can be SRS 0, SRS 1, SRS 3 and SRS 5.
  • bit state there are 16 bit states in 4 bits, but only 15 are actually used. In this case, the remaining 1 bit state can also be used for the network device to indicate other information.
  • bit state corresponds to which SRS resources can be specifically set by the network device, and the network device can also send the set correspondence to the terminal device in the form of a dictionary, so that the subsequent terminal device can follow the SRI instructions.
  • the domain queries the corresponding SRS resource from the dictionary.
  • the length of the first subsection in the SRI indication field may be 0, and the length of the second subsection in the SRI indication field may be 0.
  • the length of the part may be determined according to the number of SRS resources included in the one SRS resource subset, and the determination method may refer to the above-mentioned content, and will not be repeated here.
  • the length of the first subsection and/or the length of the second subsection is indicated by the first configuration information
  • the length of the first subsection and/or the length of the second subsection may also be calculated by the terminal device itself, or pre-defined by the network device and the terminal device.
  • the first configuration information can also indicate the value of K (and/or the indication method of the second subsection) , so that the terminal device can obtain the length of the first subsection by calculating according to the value of K in the above manner, and calculate the length of the second subsection according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset.
  • the length of the first subsection and the length of the second subsection may be obtained in the following manner:
  • the length of the first subsection and the length of the second subsection are configured in the first configuration information; or,
  • the length of the first subsection is configured in the first configuration information, and the terminal device calculates the length of the second subsection by itself according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset; or,
  • the length of the second subsection and the value of K are configured in the first configuration information, and the terminal device calculates the length of the first subsection by itself according to the value of K; or,
  • the value of K is configured in the first configuration information, the terminal device calculates the length of the first subsection by itself according to the value of K, and calculates the length of the second subsection according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset. ;or,
  • the length of the first subsection is predefined, and the first configuration information configures the length of the second subsection; or,
  • the length of the first subsection is predefined, and the terminal device calculates the length of the second subsection by itself according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset; or,
  • the length of the second subsection is predefined, and the first configuration information configures the length of the first subsection; or,
  • the length of the second subsection is predefined, the value of K is configured in the first configuration information, and the terminal device calculates the length of the first subsection by itself according to the value of K.
  • the "value of the first configuration information configuration K" shown in the above content is only an optional implementation manner, and in other optional implementation manners, the value of K can also be determined by the network device and the End devices are predefined.
  • the number K of the SRS resource subsets determines the first subset
  • the length of the part, the number 1 of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset determines the length of the second subpart, and the sum of the length of the first subpart and the length of the second subpart determines the length of the SRI indication field, Therefore, when both the first subsection and the second subsection are indicated according to the combination of bit states, K and l need to satisfy the following formula (2.2):
  • N when the terminal device has 8 transmit antennas, N can be configured to be 8.
  • L max can be configured to be 4.
  • the network device determines the target SRS resource from a subset of SRS resources each time according to the above scheme, if the network device is to be able to transmit 4 streams of data at a time (that is, to determine 4 target SRS resources), it is necessary to The number 1 of SRS resources in the subset of SRS resources is greater than or equal to 4.
  • the combination of K and l can be:
  • K is 1, and l is a positive integer less than or equal to 5, for example, l is 4 or l is 5.
  • the length of the first subsection is 0 and the length of the second subsection is 4 or 5.
  • the network device can select 5 SRS resources with low beam collision probability and better transmission performance from the 8 SRS resources to form one SRS resource subset, and subsequent network devices will only use this resource
  • the target SRS resource is selected in the subset to determine the precoding used by the terminal equipment for uplink transmission.
  • K is 2, and l is a positive integer less than or equal to 4, for example, l is 4.
  • the length of the first subsection is 1 and the length of the second subsection is 4.
  • the network device can select 6 or 7 SRS resources with better transmission performance from the 8 SRS resources to form 2 SRS resource subsets, each SRS resource subset includes 4 SRS resources, and these 2 SRS resource subsets Duplicate SRS resources may exist in a set.
  • K is 3 or 4
  • l is a positive integer less than or equal to 3
  • K is 5 or 7
  • l is a positive integer less than or equal to 2
  • the number of SRS resources in a subset of SRS resources is less than 4, so the network device can only select 3 or less target SRS resources at most each time, so that the terminal device can only transmit data of 3 streams or less in the future. In this way, the transmission capability of the terminal device is limited, which is not conducive to improving the communication performance of the terminal device and the network device. Therefore, these combinations are not suitable for dividing SRS resource subsets.
  • the number K of SRS resource subsets is equal to 1
  • the number of SRS resources included in the SRS resource subset is limited (for example, there are only 5), although this will make the network device selectable SRS resources
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource subset are selected in advance according to the beam collision situation and transmission performance, so it is not only beneficial for the uplink data transmitted by the subsequent terminal equipment to not be interfered by the signals of other terminal equipment as much as possible, but also to ensure Transmission efficiency of terminal equipment.
  • the network device can select.
  • the network equipment can only select the target SRS resource from fewer SRS resources, resulting in the terminal equipment's uplink transmission performance not reaching the desired level. to the request. Based on this, the network device can select a combination with a smaller K and a larger l from the possible combinations of K and l each time.
  • the union of the SRS resources in the K SRS resource subsets can be provided to the network device as much as possible.
  • Step 503 the network device sends the DL-RS to the terminal device.
  • Step 504 the terminal device performs downlink channel measurement on the received DL-RS, obtains the CSI of the downlink channel, and calculates N beams used for uplink transmission according to the CSI of the downlink channel.
  • Step 505 the terminal device precodes the SRS using N beams, and sends the precoded SRS to the network device.
  • Step 506 the network equipment performs channel estimation according to the precoded SRS, and calculates the uplink transmission rate when the terminal equipment uses each SRS resource, and determines an uplink transmission rate corresponding to the channel estimation result and the N SRS resources respectively. or multiple target SRS resources.
  • step 503 to step 506 For the specific implementation process of step 503 to step 506, reference may be made to FIG. 3, which will not be repeated here.
  • the network device may determine it according to the actual transmission performance and actual collision situation of N beams corresponding to the N SRS resources, so as to avoid beams with beam collisions as much as possible The corresponding SRS resources, and try to call the SRS resources corresponding to the beams with stronger transmission performance. For example, when the N SRS resources are SRS 0 to SRS 7, if there is a high probability of beam collision between the beam beam 1 corresponding to SRS 1 and the beam beam 3 corresponding to SRS 3, the network device can start from the remaining SRS 0, SRS 2, and SRS 4. , SRS 5, SRS 6, and SRS 7, select 4 SRS resources with stronger transmission performance (assuming that the terminal device supports 4-stream transmission) as the target SRS resources, namely SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 5.
  • Step 507 the network device determines whether one or more target SRS resources are located in the same SRS resource subset, if not, then executes step 508, and if so, executes step 509.
  • the second sub-part of the SRI indication field can only indicate the target SRS resource from one SRS resource subset, when each target SRS resource determined in step 506 is located in a different SRS resource subset, The network device cannot actually use the second sub-part of the SRI indication field to indicate the target SRS resource. Therefore, to indicate according to the SRI indication field in the above embodiment, it must be ensured that each target SRS resource is located in the same SRS resource subset. Based on this, after determining one or more target SRS resources, the network device also needs to determine whether the one or more target SRS resources are located in the same SRS resource subset.
  • SRS 0, SRS 2 and SRS 4 of the 4 target SRS resources SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 5 selected by the network device are located in SRS resource subset 2, and SRS 5 is located in SRS In resource subset 1, the 4 target SRS resources are not located in the same SRS resource subset.
  • Step 508 the network device reselects one or more target SRS resources from the K SRS resource subsets.
  • the network device may select an SRS resource subset containing the most target SRS resources from the K SRS resource subsets As the target SRS resource subset, one or more target SRS resources are re-determined from the target SRS resource subset. For example, in the above example, since SRS resource subset 2 includes three target SRS resources, SRS 0, SRS 2, and SRS 4, and SRS resource subset 1 includes only one target SRS resource, SRS 5, it is possible to The SRS resource subset 2 is used as the target SRS resource subset, and SRS resources with better transmission performance can be selected from the non-target SRS resources of the target SRS resource subset 2 to supplement the target SRS resources. In this way, the re-determined 4 The target SRS resources may include SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4, and SRS 6.
  • Step 509 the network device determines the value of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field according to the target SRS resource subset where the one or more target SRS resources are located, and according to the one or more target SRS resources in the target SRS resource subset. Combining the conditions, determine the value of the second sub-part in the SRI indication field.
  • the SRS resource subset where the 4 target SRS resources SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 6 are located is the SRS resource subset 2, so the value of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field may be 1.
  • the combination of SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 6 belongs to the 15th case of SRS resource combination in SRS resource subset 2 (selecting 1 SRS resource from SRS resource subset 2 includes 4 cases, from SRS The selection of 2 SRS resources from resource subset 2 includes 6 cases, the selection of 3 SRS resources from SRS resource subset 2 includes 4 cases, and the selection of 4 SRS resources from SRS resource subset 2 includes 1 case, so The case of selecting 4 SRS resources belongs to the 15th case), so according to the introduction in step 502, it can be known that the value of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field can be 1111. It can be seen that the SRI indication field is 11111.
  • Step 510 the network device sends DCI to the terminal device, and the DCI carries the SRI indication field.
  • Step 511 the terminal device determines the target SRS resource subset from the K SRS resource subsets according to the value of the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, and determines the target SRS resource subset from the value of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
  • One or more target SRS resources are determined in the subset, and uplink data is precoded using beams corresponding to the one or more target SRS resources.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device parses the DCI and determines that the SRI indication field is 11111, the terminal device may first determine the value of the first subsection from the SRI indication field according to the length of the first subsection, that is, 1, and then determine The bit state in which the value of the first sub-part is 1 corresponds to SRS resource subset 2. Further, the terminal device can determine the value of the second subsection from the SRI indication field according to the length of the second subsection, that is, 1111, and then determine the value of the second subsection from the SRS resource subset 2 to be 1111.
  • the bit states of are corresponding to SRS0, SRS2, SRS4 and SRS6.
  • Step 512 the terminal device sends the precoded uplink data to the network device.
  • the terminal device may divide the uplink data into 4 streams, and then use the beams beam0, beam2, beam4, and beam6 corresponding to SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4, and SRS 6 to weight these 4 streams respectively.
  • Stream data and send the weighted 4 streams of data to the network device respectively.
  • steps 506 to 512 take determining the target SRS resource from at least two SRS resource subsets as an example to introduce the indication process of determining the SRI indication field.
  • the network device can directly determine the SRI indication field according to the combination of one or more target SRS resources in the one SRS resource subset, and the terminal device can also directly according to the SRI indication The domain determines one or more target SRS resources from this subset of SRS resources.
  • the network device can configure the SRI indication field as 11101.
  • the terminal device knows that there is only one SRS resource subset according to the length 0 of the first subpart, so the terminal device can directly determine the value of one or more target SRS resources according to the value of the second subpart 11101
  • the combination belongs to the 29th combination case (5 SRS resources are included in the SRS resource subset, and 1 SRS resource is selected from the SRS resource subset, including 5 cases, corresponding to 00001 to 00101; 2 SRS resources are selected from the SRS resource subset, including 10 cases, corresponding to 00110 ⁇ 01111; 3 SRS resources selected from the SRS resource subset include 10 cases, corresponding to 10000 ⁇ 11001; 4 SRS resources selected from the SRS resource subset, including 5 cases, corresponding to 11010 ⁇ 11110: Selecting 5 SRS resources from the SRS resource subset includes 1 case, corresponding to 11111), so the combination of the corresponding target SRS resources is SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 6.
  • the network device obtains K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources, and uses the first sub-part of the SRI indication field to indicate the target SRS resource subset where the target SRS resource is located, and uses the second sub-part of the SRI indication field to indicate the target SRS resource subset.
  • the subsections indicate target SRS resources in a subset of target SRS resources.
  • Making the sum of the number of bits in the SRI indication field less than N helps to reduce the number of bits in the SRI indication field, and correspondingly reduces the number of bits in the SRI indication field.
  • the data volume of DCI improves the reliability of DCI transmission. Further, whether it is considering transmission performance and beam interference when dividing SRS resource subsets, or providing more optional SRS resources to network equipment by dividing fewer SRS resource subsets, it can improve network equipment scheduling.
  • the comprehensive performance of SRS resources with high transmission performance and beam interference avoidance helps terminal equipment to transmit uplink data that is not interfered by beams of other terminal equipment with better uplink transmission capability.
  • FIG. 6 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application.
  • the method may be executed by a network device and a terminal device, such as the network device and the terminal device shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the method includes:
  • Step 601 the network device divides the N SRS resources into a first SRS resource subset and a second SRS resource subset, wherein the first SRS resource subset includes M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, and the second SRS resource The subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources.
  • M is a positive integer less than N.
  • the M SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset may be the first M SRS resources (that is, SRS 0 ⁇ SRS M ) obtained by arranging the N SRS resources in descending order of transmission performance.
  • the NM SRS resources included in the second SRS resource subset may be the last NM SRS resources (ie, SRS M ⁇ SRS N) obtained by arranging the N SRS resources from strong to weak according to the transmission performance.
  • the transmission performance of the M SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset is relatively strong
  • the transmission performance of the N-M SRS resources included in the second SRS resource subset is relatively weak.
  • the network device cannot only set The first SRS resource subset contains the strongest L max SRS resources, but also the second SRS resource subset needs to be set.
  • the network device in order to make the number of bits of the SRI indication field smaller than L max , it is necessary to configure the number M of SRS resources included in the first resource subset to be smaller than L max .
  • the SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset are The number M can be set to a value slightly smaller than Lmax .
  • the network device can divide the first 3 resource subsets SRS 0, SRS 1 and SRS 2 with the strongest transmission performance into the first SRS resource subset, and divide the remaining 5 resource subsets SRS 3 to SRS 7 into the second SRS resource subset.
  • Step 602 The network device sends second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate the length of the first sub-part and the length of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
  • the first sub-part of the SRI indication field may indicate the first target SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset in the form of a bitmap.
  • the first sub-part of the SRI indication field The length of the part is the same as the number M of SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset, and each bit in the first sub-part of the SRI indication field can correspond to one SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset.
  • the value is 1, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to this bit belongs to a first target SRS resource, and when the value of this bit is 0, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to this bit does not belong to the first target SRS resource.
  • the length of the second subsection of the SRI can be determined according to the number of bits to which the SRI is expected to be compressed and the length of the first subsection.
  • the length of the second subsection can be set to 2 bits, and each bit state of these 2 bits can correspond to a combination of the second target SRS resources.
  • the corresponding relationship between the various bit states of the second target SRS resource and the combination of the second target SRS resource may be predefined by the network device and the terminal device, or may be indicated in the second configuration information, or may be indicated in high-level signaling, which is not specifically limited .
  • Table 3 exemplarily shows the correspondence between the various bit states of the second subsection and the combination of the second target SRS resources.
  • the first M SRS resources with the strongest transmission performance among the N SRS resources That is, SRS 0 ⁇ SRS M-1) are placed in the first SRS resource subset, and the next NM SRS resources (ie SRS M ⁇ SRS N) with weaker transmission performance among the N SRS resources are placed in the first SRS resource subset.
  • Step 603 the network device sends the DL-RS to the terminal device.
  • Step 604 the terminal device performs downlink channel measurement on the received DL-RS, obtains the CSI of the downlink channel, calculates N beams used for uplink transmission according to the CSI of the downlink channel, and uses the N beams to precode the SRS.
  • Step 605 the terminal device sends the precoded SRS to the network device.
  • Step 606 the network equipment performs channel estimation according to the precoded SRS, and calculates the uplink transmission rate when the terminal equipment uses each SRS resource, and determines an uplink transmission rate corresponding to the channel estimation result and the N SRS resources respectively. or multiple target SRS resources.
  • step 603 to step 606 For the specific implementation process of step 603 to step 606, reference may be made to FIG. 3, which will not be repeated here.
  • the network device when determining one or more target SRS resources, may determine it according to the actual transmission performance of the N beams corresponding to the N SRS resources and the actual collision situation, so as to avoid the corresponding beams with collisions as much as possible. and try to call the SRS resources corresponding to the beam with stronger transmission performance.
  • the network device can select from the remaining SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 3, SRS 4, SRS 5, SRS 6 , In SRS 7, 4 SRS resources with stronger transmission performance (assuming that the terminal device supports 4-stream transmission) are selected as the target SRS resources, namely SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 3 and SRS 4.
  • Step 607 the network device determines the value of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field according to the target SRS resources included in the first resource subset, and determines the first sub-section in the SRI indication field according to the target SRS resources included in the second resource subset. The value of the second subsection.
  • the target SRS included in the first resource subset are SRS 0 and SRS 2, according to the bitmap indication method in step 602, it can be determined that the bit state of the first subsection in the SRI indication field is 101 .
  • the target SRS included in the second resource subset are SRS 3 and SRS 4, according to the corresponding relationship shown in Table 3, it can be determined that the bit state of the second sub-part in the SRI indication field is 10. From this, it can be seen that the SRI indication field is 10110.
  • the target SRS resource may not exist in the first resource subset.
  • the SRI indicates each of the first subsections in the field.
  • the value of the bit can be 0.
  • the target SRS resource may not exist in the second resource subset.
  • the SRI indicates each bit of the second sub-part in the field The value of the bit can also be 0.
  • Step 608 the network device sends DCI to the terminal device, and the DCI carries the SRI indication field.
  • Step 609 the terminal device determines the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset according to the value of the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, and determines the first target SRS resource from the second SRS resource according to the value of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
  • the second target SRS resource is determined in the resource subset, the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource are used as the target SRS resource, and the uplink data is precoded by using the beam corresponding to the target SRS resource.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device parses the DCI and determines that the SRI indication field is 10110, the terminal device may first determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field according to the length M of the first subsection (corresponding to 3 in this example). The bit state of , that is, 101, and then it is determined from the first resource subset that the bit state 101 of the first subpart corresponds to SRS 0 and SRS 2. Further, the terminal device can determine the bit state of the second subsection from the SRI indication field according to the length of the second subsection (corresponding to 2 in this example), that is, 10, and then according to the corresponding relationship shown in Table 3 from In the second resource subset, it is determined that the bit state 10 of the second subsection corresponds to SRS 3 and SRS 4. Therefore, the target SRS resources are SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 3 and SRS 4.
  • the network device may not perform the division operation, but directly send the value of M to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may not perform the division operation, but after receiving the SRI indication field, directly determine the first target SRS resource from the first M SRS resources with the best transmission performance according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field. , and directly determine the second target SRS resource from the next NM SRS resources according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
  • Step 610 the terminal device sends the precoded uplink data to the network device.
  • the terminal device can first divide the uplink data into 4 streams, and then use the beams beam0, beam2, beam3 and beam4 corresponding to SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 3 and SRS 4 respectively to weight the 4 streams of data, and respectively
  • the weighted 4-stream data is sent to the network device.
  • the network device divides the N SRS resources into 2 SRS resource subsets, and uses the first sub-part and the second sub-part of the SRI indication field to respectively indicate the target SRS resources in the 2 SRS resource subsets,
  • This method not only enables the network device to comprehensively select the target SRS resource from the two SRS resource subsets, but also makes the sum of the bits of the SRI indication field less than N when the two SRS resource subsets are reasonably configured.
  • N bits to indicate N SRS resources it is helpful to reduce the number of bits of the SRI indication field, correspondingly reduce the data amount of the DCI carrying the SRI indication field, and improve the reliability of DCI transmission.
  • the SRS resources with strong transmission performance and the SRS resources with weak transmission performance are divided into different SRS resource subsets respectively, and SRS resources with different transmission performances are called from different SRS resource subsets respectively, so that the network device can follow the Scheduling of SRS resources based on the transmission performance of the SRS resources can not only help the network equipment to schedule as many SRS resources with strong transmission performance as possible, but also allow the network to The equipment schedules SRS resources with weak transmission performance, so that it can take into account the ability to schedule SRS resources with strong transmission performance and the ability to avoid interference from other beams, so that subsequent terminal equipment can transmit uplink transmission with better uplink transmission capability that is not interfered by the beams of other terminal equipment. data.
  • the N SRS resources may also be divided into two subsets.
  • the resources are divided into three or more SRS resource subsets, and the transmission performance of the SRS resources in the three or more SRS resource subsets decreases sequentially.
  • the SRI indication field may include three or more subsections, and each subsection corresponds to a resource subset. This embodiment can perform more fine-grained division on the N SRS resources, which helps the network device to schedule SRS resources with different transmission performance in a more balanced manner.
  • each network element in the above-mentioned implementation includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function.
  • the present invention can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of an information indicating device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the information indicating device may be a terminal device or a network device, or may be a chip or a circuit, for example, it may be provided in a terminal A chip or circuit of a device, for example, a chip or circuit that can be provided in a network device.
  • the information indicating device 701 may further include a bus system, wherein the processor 702, the memory 704, and the transceiver 703 may be connected through the bus system.
  • the above-mentioned processor 702 may be a chip.
  • the processor 702 may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a system on chip (SoC). It can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller). unit, MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • SoC system on chip
  • SoC system on chip
  • MCU microcontroller
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • each step of the above-mentioned method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 702 or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor 702 .
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 704, and the processor 702 reads the information in the memory 704, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • processor 702 in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability.
  • each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory 704 in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the information indicating device 701 corresponds to the terminal device in the above method
  • the information indicating device may include a processor 702 , a transceiver 703 and a memory 704 .
  • the memory 704 is used for storing instructions
  • the processor 702 is used for executing the instructions stored in the memory 704, so as to implement the relevant solution of the terminal device in the corresponding method of any one or any of the items shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 above. .
  • the information indicating device 701 may be configured to execute the method executed by the terminal device in any one of the first embodiment to the third embodiment.
  • the information indicating device 701 is the above-mentioned terminal device, and when the first embodiment is implemented, the transceiver 703 may receive the first information sent by the network device, and the processor 702 may identify at least one of the SRI indication fields according to the sounding reference signal resource carried in the first information In the subsection, the target SRS resource is determined from the K sounding reference signal SRS resource subsets, and the target SRS resource is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission.
  • the first information includes an SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target sounding reference signal SRS resource to enable the terminal equipment to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS
  • the resource is one or more of N SRS resources used by the terminal device when sending SRS, the N SRS resources are used to obtain K SRS resource subsets, and each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes N SRS resources For one or more SRS resources in the SRS resources, K and N are positive integers, and K ⁇ N.
  • the information indicating device 701 corresponds to the terminal device in the above method
  • the information indicating device may include a processor 702 , a transceiver 703 and a memory 704 .
  • the memory 704 is used for storing instructions
  • the processor 702 is used for executing the instructions stored in the memory 704, so as to implement the relevant solution of the terminal device in the corresponding method of any one or any of the items shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 above. .
  • the information indicating device 701 may be configured to execute the method executed by the network device in any one of the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 3.
  • the information indicating device 701 is the above-mentioned network device, and when the first embodiment is implemented, the processor 702 can obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources used when the terminal device sends the sounding reference signal SRS, and the transceiver 703 can send to the terminal device.
  • the first information is received, and the terminal equipment uses precoding to perform physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission uplink data.
  • the first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target SRS resource to enable the terminal device to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS resource is One or more of the N SRS resources, each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes one or more SRS resources of the N SRS resources, K and N are positive integers, and K ⁇ N.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an information indication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • an information indication apparatus 801 may include a communication interface 803 , a processor 802 and a memory 804 .
  • the communication interface 803 is used for inputting and/or outputting information;
  • the processor 802 is used for executing a computer program or instruction, so that the information indicating device 801 implements the method on the terminal device side in the above-mentioned related solutions of FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 , or make the information indicating device 801 implement the method on the network device side in the above-mentioned related solutions of FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 .
  • the communication interface 803 can implement the solution implemented by the transceiver 703 in FIG. 7
  • the processor 802 can implement the solution implemented by the processor 702 in FIG. 7
  • the memory 804 can implement the memory 704 in FIG. 7 .
  • the implemented solution will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an information indicating apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the information indicating apparatus 901 may be a terminal device or a network device, or may be a chip or a circuit, such as Chips or circuits that can be installed in terminal equipment or network equipment.
  • the information indicating device may correspond to the terminal device in the above method.
  • the information indicating apparatus may implement the steps performed by the terminal device in any one or more of the corresponding methods shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 above.
  • the information indicating device may include a processing unit 902 and a transceiving unit 903 .
  • the transceiver unit 903 can be a sending unit or a transmitter when sending information, the transceiver unit 903 can be a receiving unit or a receiver when receiving information, and the transceiver unit 903 can be a transceiver.
  • the transmitter, transmitter or receiver can be a radio frequency circuit
  • the processing unit 902 executes the computer instructions stored in the storage unit , so that the information indicating apparatus 901 can be used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in any one of the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 3.
  • the processing unit 902 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC).
  • the information indicating device 901 is the above-mentioned terminal device, and when the first embodiment is implemented, the transceiver unit 903 may receive the first information sent by the network device, and the processing unit 902 may identify at least one of the SRI indication fields according to the sounding reference signal resource carried in the first information In the subsection, the target SRS resource is determined from the K sounding reference signal SRS resource subsets, and the target SRS resource is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission.
  • the first information includes an SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target sounding reference signal SRS resource to enable the terminal equipment to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS
  • the resource is one or more of N SRS resources used by the terminal device when sending SRS, the N SRS resources are used to obtain K SRS resource subsets, and each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes N SRS resources For one or more SRS resources in the SRS resources, K and N are positive integers, and K ⁇ N.
  • the transceiver unit 903 can be a sending unit or a transmitter when sending information, the transceiver unit 903 can be a receiving unit or a receiver when receiving information, and the transceiver unit 903 can be a transceiver.
  • the transmitter, transmitter or receiver can be a radio frequency circuit
  • the information indicating device 901 includes a storage unit, the storage unit is used to store computer instructions, the processor is connected in communication with the memory, and the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory to make the information
  • the instructing apparatus 901 may be configured to execute the method executed by the network device in any one of the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 3.
  • the processor may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, or an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC).
  • the information indicating device 901 is the above-mentioned network device, and when the first embodiment is implemented, the processing unit 902 can obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources used when the terminal device sends the sounding reference signal SRS, and the transceiver unit 903 can send to the terminal device.
  • the first information is received, and the terminal equipment uses precoding to perform physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission uplink data.
  • the first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target SRS resource to enable the terminal device to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS resource is One or more of the N SRS resources, each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes one or more SRS resources of the N SRS resources, K and N are positive integers, and K ⁇ N.
  • the transceiver unit 903 may be an input and/or output interface, a pin or a circuit, or the like.
  • the processing unit 902 can execute the computer-executable instructions stored in the storage unit, so that the information instructs the chip in the device 901 to execute the method executed in any of the first to third embodiments.
  • the storage unit is a storage unit in a chip, such as a register, a cache, etc., and the storage unit can also be a storage unit located outside the chip in the information indicating device 901, such as a read-only memory (Read Only Memory, ROM) or Other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, such as Random Access Memory (RAM).
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • each unit in the above-mentioned information indicating apparatus 901 may refer to the implementation of the corresponding method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the division of the units of the above information indicating apparatus 901 is only a division of logical functions, and may be fully or partially integrated into a physical entity in actual implementation, or may be physically separated.
  • the transceiver unit 903 may be implemented by the transceiver 703 shown in FIG. 7 above
  • the processing unit 902 may be implemented by the processor 702 shown in FIG. 7 above.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the steps shown in FIGS. 1 to 6 .
  • the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are executed on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 .
  • the present application further provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, high-density digital video discs (DVDs)), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state discs, SSD)) etc.
  • the network equipment in the above apparatus embodiments corresponds to the terminal equipment and the network equipment or terminal equipment in the method embodiments, and corresponding steps are performed by corresponding modules or units, for example, the communication unit (transceiver) performs the receiving or sending in the method embodiments.
  • the steps other than sending and receiving can be performed by the processing unit (processor).
  • processor For functions of specific units, reference may be made to corresponding method embodiments.
  • the number of processors may be one or more.
  • a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer.
  • an application running on a computing device and the computing device may be components.
  • One or more components may reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component may be localized on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers.
  • these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • data packets eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Abstract

An information indication method and apparatus, used for solving the technical problem that an SRI indication field sent by a network device is too large when a terminal device supports many transmit antennas. The method comprises: a network device obtains K SRS resource subsets according to N SRS resources of a terminal device, and sets an SRI indication field to comprise at least one sub-portion to instruct the terminal device to determine, according to the at least one sub-portion and from the K SRS resource subsets, precoding used for uplink transmission. By using a combined mode of dividing the N SRS resources and changing the structure of the SRI indication field, the precoding used for uplink transmission is indicated, and as long as the N SRS resources are divided in a reasonable mode, even if the terminal device supports many transmit antennas and thus the value of N is large, the number of bits of the SRI indication field can be compressed to be less than N. Such a grouping indication mode is helpful to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field is too large.

Description

一种信息指示方法及装置A kind of information indicating method and device 技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种信息指示方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to an information indication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
多输入多输出(multiple input multiple output,MIMO)技术是长期演进(long term evolution)系统以及新无线(New Radio,NR)系统中的核心技术。在以往的单输入单输出(single input single output,SISO)系统中,由于发射端和接收端之间采用单根发射天线,因此发射端会通过广播方式将信号传输给接收端,这种情况下,信号的能量会向四周辐射,导致信号的能量被浪费。而在MIMO系统中,发射端和接收端之间采用多根发射天线,发送端在发送信号之前可以先对信号进行预编码处理,而预编码处理后的信号可以更有指向性的发送给各个接收端。由此可知,MIMO技术通过多根发射天线进行空间分集和复用,能够提升数据传输的可靠性和信道增益。Multiple input multiple output (multiple input multiple output, MIMO) technology is a core technology in long term evolution (long term evolution) systems and new radio (New Radio, NR) systems. In the previous single input single output (SISO) system, since a single transmitting antenna is used between the transmitting end and the receiving end, the transmitting end will transmit the signal to the receiving end by broadcasting. In this case , the energy of the signal will radiate around, causing the energy of the signal to be wasted. In a MIMO system, multiple transmitting antennas are used between the transmitting end and the receiving end. The transmitting end can precode the signal before sending the signal, and the precoded signal can be sent to each Receiving end. It can be seen that the MIMO technology performs spatial diversity and multiplexing through multiple transmit antennas, which can improve the reliability and channel gain of data transmission.
在NR系统中,上行物理共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)根据预编码方式的不同,可以包括如下两种传输方案:基于码本的(codebook-based,CB)传输和基于非码本的(non-codebook-based,NCB)传输。对于CB传输,网络设备和终端设备之间维护同一个码本,网络设备通过向终端设备提供传输预编码矩阵的指示,使终端设备根据该指示从码本中选择出PUSCH传输所使用的预编码。而对于NCB传输,各个探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)对应的预编码资源由终端设备计算得到,网络设备通过在下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中携带SRS资源标识(SRS Resource Indicator,SRI)指示域,使终端设备根据SRI指示域从自己计算出的预编码资源中选择出PUSCH传输所使用的预编码。NCB传输能够由终端设备自行计算得到预编码资源,其对终端设备在各种场合下的适应性都比较好,因此得到越来越普遍的应用。In the NR system, the uplink physical shared channel (PUSCH) can include the following two transmission schemes according to different precoding methods: codebook-based (CB) transmission and non-codebook-based transmission (non-codebook-based, NCB) transmission. For CB transmission, the same codebook is maintained between the network equipment and the terminal equipment. The network equipment provides the terminal equipment with an indication of the transmission precoding matrix, so that the terminal equipment can select the precoding used for PUSCH transmission from the codebook according to the indication. . For NCB transmission, the precoding resources corresponding to each sounding reference signal (SRS) are calculated by the terminal device, and the network device carries the SRS resource identifier (SRS Resource Indicator) in the downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI). , SRI) indication field, so that the terminal device selects the precoding used for PUSCH transmission from the precoding resources calculated by itself according to the SRI indication field. NCB transmission can obtain precoding resources by self-calculation of the terminal equipment, and its adaptability to the terminal equipment in various occasions is relatively good, so it is more and more widely used.
目前,终端设备最多只能支持4个发射天线,按照现有标准的设计逻辑,SRI指示域也至多占用4比特。然而,在未来系统的演进中,终端设备支持的发射天线数将进一步增加,而这会导致SRI指示域所占用的比特位数也对应线性增加。例如当终端设备支持8个发射天线时,按照现有标准的设计逻辑,SRI指示域所占用的比特位数也将增多至8比特。这种方式会极大地增加DCI的传输负担,容易造成丢包现象,降低DCI的传输可靠性。现阶段还不存在解决当终端设备支持较多发射天线(例如8个或更多的发射天线)时网络设备发送的SRI指示域过大的技术问题的方案。At present, a terminal device can only support 4 transmit antennas at most. According to the design logic of the existing standard, the SRI indication field also occupies 4 bits at most. However, in the future evolution of the system, the number of transmit antennas supported by the terminal equipment will further increase, which will lead to a corresponding linear increase in the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field. For example, when the terminal device supports 8 transmit antennas, according to the design logic of the existing standard, the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field will also increase to 8 bits. This method will greatly increase the transmission burden of DCI, easily cause packet loss, and reduce the transmission reliability of DCI. At this stage, there is no solution to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field sent by the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas (eg, 8 or more transmit antennas).
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请提供一种信息指示方法及装置,用以解决当终端设备支持较多发射天线时网络设备发送的SRI指示域过大的技术问题。The present application provides an information indication method and apparatus to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field sent by the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas.
第一方面,本申请提供一种信息指示方法,该方法应用于终端设备,该方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一信息,根据第一信息中携带的SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从K个SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源,进而使用目标SRS资源确定PUSCH传输所使用的预编码。其中,第一信息中包括SRI指示域,SRI指示域包括至少一个子部 分,SRI指示域通过指示目标探测参考信号SRS资源,令终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,目标SRS资源为终端设备发送SRS时使用的N个SRS资源中的一个或多个,N个SRS资源用于得到K个SRS资源子集,K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源。其中,K、N为正整数,K≤N。In a first aspect, the present application provides an information indication method, which is applied to a terminal device. The method includes: the terminal device receives first information sent by a network device, and indicates at least one sub-part of a field according to an SRI carried in the first information. , determine the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets, and then use the target SRS resource to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission. The first information includes an SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target sounding reference signal SRS resource to enable the terminal equipment to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS The resource is one or more of N SRS resources used by the terminal device when sending SRS, the N SRS resources are used to obtain K SRS resource subsets, and each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes N SRS resources One or more of the SRS resources. Among them, K and N are positive integers, and K≤N.
上述设计采用划分SRS资源和改变SRI指示域结构相结合的方式来指示上行传输所使用的预编码,只要N个SRS资源的划分方式合理(例如合理控制SRS资源子集的数量和每个SRS资源子集中SRS资源的数量),即使终端设备支持较多发射天线导致N的取值较大,也能够实现将SRI指示域的比特位数压缩到N以下。相比于直接使用N个比特位指示N个SRS资源的方式来说,这种分组指示的方式有助于解决当终端设备支持较多发射天线时网络设备的SRI指示域过大的技术问题,也能够相应降低携带SRI指示域的DCI的数据量,提高DCI传输的可靠性。The above design uses a combination of dividing SRS resources and changing the structure of the SRI indication field to indicate the precoding used for uplink transmission, as long as the division method of the N SRS resources is reasonable (for example, the number of SRS resource subsets and the number of each SRS resource are reasonably controlled. The number of SRS resources in the subset), even if the terminal device supports more transmit antennas, resulting in a larger value of N, the number of bits in the SRI indication field can be compressed to less than N. Compared with the way of directly using N bits to indicate N SRS resources, this way of grouping indication helps to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field of the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas. The data amount of the DCI carrying the SRI indication field can also be correspondingly reduced, and the reliability of the DCI transmission can be improved.
在一种可选的设计中,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一信息之前,还接收网络设备发送的配置信息,该配置信息用于指示K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包含的SRS资源。如此,通过网络设备提前配置终端设备的K个SRS资源子集并通知给终端设备,有助于使网络设备和终端设备后续基于统一的配置执行基于非码本的传输操作,提高网络设备在SRI指示域中指示目标SRS资源的便捷性。In an optional design, before receiving the first information sent by the network device, the terminal device also receives configuration information sent by the network device, where the configuration information is used to indicate that each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets contains SRS resources. In this way, the K SRS resource subsets of the terminal device are configured in advance by the network device and notified to the terminal device, which helps the network device and the terminal device to perform non-codebook-based transmission operations based on the unified configuration subsequently, and improves the SRI performance of the network device. The convenience of indicating the target SRS resource in the indication field.
在一种可选的设计中,当K大于或等于2,则至少一个子部分可以包括第一子部分和第二子部分,第一子部分用于指示K个SRS资源子集中的一个SRS资源子集,第二子部分用于指示一个SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源。这种情况下,终端设备根据SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从K个SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源,包括:终端设备根据SRI指示域的第一子部分,从K个SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源子集,进而根据SRI指示域的第二子部分,从目标SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源。如此,通过将SRI指示域划分为两级指示结构,能够使用这两级指示结构从K个SRS资源子集中准确指示出目标SRS资源,该种指示方式与划分SRS资源的方式相对应,有助于在划分SRS资源的情况下保证终端设备正常向网络设备传输上行数据。In an optional design, when K is greater than or equal to 2, at least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, and the first subsection is used to indicate one SRS resource in the K SRS resource subsets Subset, the second subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in a subset of SRS resources. In this case, the terminal device determines the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI indication field, including: The target SRS resource subset is determined centrally, and then the target SRS resource is determined from the target SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field. In this way, by dividing the SRI indication field into a two-level indication structure, the two-level indication structure can be used to accurately indicate the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets. This indication method corresponds to the method of dividing the SRS resources, which helps In the case of dividing SRS resources, it is ensured that the terminal device normally transmits uplink data to the network device.
本申请实施例中,K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源可以有多种情况,例如:In the embodiment of the present application, the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets may be in various situations, for example:
在一种情况下,K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的传输性能强于预设传输性能。如此,网络设备能够从传输性能较强的SRS资源中选择目标SRS资源,从而目标SRS资源的传输性能较好,有助于提高终端设备上行传输的效率。In one case, the transmission performance of the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets is stronger than the preset transmission performance. In this way, the network device can select the target SRS resource from the SRS resources with stronger transmission performance, so that the transmission performance of the target SRS resource is better, which helps to improve the efficiency of the uplink transmission of the terminal device.
在另一种情况下,K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源与其他终端设备的波束干扰概率小于预设概率。如此,网络设备选择出的目标SRS资源也大概率不会和其它终端设备发生波束碰撞,从而终端设备使用目标SRS资源确定的预编码进行上行传输的质量较好。In another case, the beam interference probability between the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets and other terminal equipments is less than a preset probability. In this way, the target SRS resource selected by the network device also has a high probability of not having beam collision with other terminal devices, so that the terminal device uses the precoding determined by the target SRS resource to perform uplink transmission with better quality.
在又一种情况下,K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的传输性能强于预设传输性能,且K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源与其他终端设备的波束干扰概率小于预设概率。如此,网络设备能够从传输性能较强且大概率不与其它终端设备发生波束碰撞的SRS资源中选择目标SRS资源,不仅有助于提高终端设备上行传输的效率,还能提高上行传输的质量。In yet another case, the transmission performance of the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets is stronger than the preset transmission performance, and the beam interference probability between the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets and other terminal equipment is smaller than the preset probability . In this way, the network device can select the target SRS resource from the SRS resources with strong transmission performance and no beam collision with other terminal devices, which not only helps to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission of the terminal device, but also improves the quality of uplink transmission.
在一种可选的设计中,K个SRS资源子集的任意两个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量相同,K的取值和每个SRS资源子集中的SRS资源可以由高层信令配置或预定 义。这种情况下,终端设备接收网络设备发送的配置信息之后,还可以根据K的取值,确定第一比特位数,根据每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量,确定第二比特位数。其中,第一比特位数和第二比特位数的和等于SRI指示域的比特位数,第一比特位数用于终端设备从SRI指示域中确定出第一子部分,第二比特位数用于终端设备从SRI指示域中确定出第二子部分。如此,通过终端设备自行计算得到第一比特位数和第二比特位数,而非由网络设备进行计算并通知,能够降低网络设备和终端设备传输的信令开销。In an optional design, the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same, and the value of K and the SRS resources in each SRS resource subset can be determined by high-level signaling Configured or predefined. In this case, after the terminal device receives the configuration information sent by the network device, it can also determine the first bit number according to the value of K, and determine the second bit number according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset number. The sum of the first number of bits and the second number of bits is equal to the number of bits of the SRI indication field, the first number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, and the number of second bits is Used by the terminal device to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field. In this way, the first number of bits and the second number of bits are obtained by the terminal device itself, rather than being calculated and notified by the network device, which can reduce signaling overhead transmitted by the network device and the terminal device.
在一种可选的设计中,第一比特位数和第二比特位数可以由高层信令配置或预定义,其中,第一比特位数用于从SRI指示域中确定出第一子部分,第二比特位数用于从SRI指示域中确定出第二子部分。如此,通过网络设备计算终端设备对应的第一比特位数和第二比特位数并下发给终端设备,使得终端设备上行传输所使用的相关参数由网络设备来决定,从而有助于提高网络设备对终端设备的管理,使上行传输更符合标准流程。In an optional design, the first number of bits and the second number of bits may be configured or predefined by high-level signaling, wherein the first number of bits is used to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field , the second number of bits is used to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field. In this way, the first bit number and the second bit number corresponding to the terminal device are calculated by the network device and sent to the terminal device, so that the relevant parameters used for the uplink transmission of the terminal device are determined by the network device, thereby helping to improve network performance. Device-to-terminal device management makes uplink transmission more in line with standard procedures.
在一种可选的设计中,当K为1,则:SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的L个SRS资源,SRI指示域的比特位数为L,L个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成L个比特的一种比特状态,L个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源对应L个比特的一种比特状态,其中,L为小于N的正整数。这种情况下,终端设备根据SRI的至少一个子部分,从K个SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源,包括:终端设备根据SRI指示域的L个比特的比特状态,从L个SRS资源中确定目标SRS资源。如此,通过从N个SRS资源中选取L个SRS资源构成1个SRS资源子集,使得网络设备只需要从这L个SRS资源中选择目标SRS资源,因此SRI指示域对应的比特位数只需要指示出这L个SRS资源的组合状态即可,而无需指示出N个SRS资源的全部组合状态,这种方式可以降低SRI指示域的比特位数。In an optional design, when K is 1, then: the SRS resource subset includes L SRS resources among the N SRS resources, the number of bits in the SRI indication field is L, and the number of bits in each of the L bits is L. A combination of values constitutes a bit state of L bits, and one or more SRS resources in the L SRS resources correspond to a bit state of L bits, where L is a positive integer smaller than N. In this case, the terminal device determines the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI, including: Determine the target SRS resource. In this way, one SRS resource subset is formed by selecting L SRS resources from N SRS resources, so that the network device only needs to select the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources, so the number of bits corresponding to the SRI indication field only needs to be It is only necessary to indicate the combined state of the L SRS resources, instead of indicating all the combined states of the N SRS resources, in this way, the number of bits of the SRI indication field can be reduced.
在一种可选的设计中,当K为2,则:K个SRS资源子集包括第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集,第一SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的M个SRS资源,第二SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中除M个SRS资源以外的N-M个SRS资源,其中,M为小于N的正整数。这种情况下,至少一个子部分可以包括第一子部分和第二子部分,第一子部分用于指示第一SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源,第二子部分用于指示第二SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源。终端设备根据SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从K个SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源,包括:终端设备根据SRI指示域的第一子部分,从第一SRS资源子集中确定第一目标SRS资源,进而根据SRI指示域的第二子部分,从第二SRS资源子集中确定第二目标SRS资源,最后将第一目标SRS资源和第二目标SRS资源作为一个或多个目标SRS资源。通过该设计,网络设备能够从2个SRS资源子集中分别选择出部分SRS资源来构成目标SRS资源,而无需只从1个SRS资源子集中选择全部的目标SRS资源,从而有助于提高网络设备选择SRS资源的均衡性。In an optional design, when K is 2, then: the K SRS resource subsets include a first SRS resource subset and a second SRS resource subset, and the first SRS resource subset includes N SRS resource subsets. There are M SRS resources, and the second SRS resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where M is a positive integer smaller than N. In this case, at least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used to indicate the first subsection One or more SRS resources in a subset of two SRS resources. The terminal device determines the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI indication field, including: the terminal device determines the first target from the first SRS resource subset according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field. SRS resource, and then determine the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field, and finally use the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource as one or more target SRS resources. Through this design, the network device can select part of the SRS resources from the two SRS resource subsets to form the target SRS resources, instead of selecting all the target SRS resources from only one SRS resource subset, which helps to improve the network equipment. Select the balance of SRS resources.
在一种可选的设计中,第一SRS资源子集中包括的M个SRS资源为N个SRS资源按照传输性能由强到弱排列的前M个SRS资源,第二SRS资源子集中包括的N-M个SRS资源为N个SRS资源按照传输性能由强到弱排列的后N-M个SRS资源。通过该设计,网络设备能够按照SRS资源的传输性能的强弱情况进行SRS资源的调度,既能有助于网络设备尽可能调度更多的强传输性能的SRS资源,又能在强传输性能的SRS资源存在波束碰撞时让网络设备调度弱传输性能的SRS资源,从而能够兼顾调度强传输性能的SRS资源和规避其它波束干扰的能力,便于后续终端设备以较好的上行传输能力传输不被其它终 端设备的波束干扰的上行数据。In an optional design, the M SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset are the first M SRS resources in which the N SRS resources are arranged in descending order of transmission performance, and the NM SRS resources included in the second SRS resource subset The SRS resources are the last NM SRS resources in which the N SRS resources are arranged in descending order of transmission performance. Through this design, the network device can schedule the SRS resources according to the strength of the transmission performance of the SRS resources, which not only helps the network device to schedule more SRS resources with strong transmission performance as much as possible, but also can schedule SRS resources with strong transmission performance. When SRS resources have beam collisions, network equipment can schedule SRS resources with weak transmission performance, so that both the ability to schedule SRS resources with strong transmission performance and the ability to avoid interference from other beams can be taken into account, which is convenient for subsequent terminal equipment to transmit with better uplink transmission ability. Uplink data of the beam interference of the terminal equipment.
在一种可选的设计中,配置信息用于指示M。这种情况下,终端设备接收网络设备发送的配置信息之后,还可以根据M将N个SRS资源划分到第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集中。如此,终端设备能够预先按照网络设备指示的方式划分N个SRS资源子集,从而在后续接收到SRI指示域时,终端设备能够准确确定出目标SRS资源。In an optional design, configuration information is used to indicate M. In this case, after receiving the configuration information sent by the network device, the terminal device may further divide the N SRS resources into the first SRS resource subset and the second SRS resource subset according to M. In this way, the terminal device can divide N SRS resource subsets in advance according to the manner indicated by the network device, so that when the SRI indication field is subsequently received, the terminal device can accurately determine the target SRS resource.
在一种可选的设计中,第一子部分的长度为M比特,M比特中的每个比特对应M个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,当M比特中的第一比特的取值为第一值时,指示使用第一比特对应的SRS资源确定PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,第一比特为M比特中的任一比特。这种情况下,终端设备根据SRI指示域的第一子部分,从第一SRS资源子集中确定第一目标SRS资源,包括:终端设备将第一子部分中取值为第一值的比特位对应的SRS资源作为第一目标SRS资源。通过该设计,终端设备能够根据SRI指示域中第一子部分的每个比特位确定出第一SRS资源子集中的每个SRS资源是否被调用,当第一SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的传输性能较好时,这种方式有助于终端设备准确确定出上行传输所使用的强传输性能的SRS资源。In an optional design, the length of the first sub-part is M bits, and each bit in the M bits corresponds to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, when the value of the first bit in the M bits is the th When the value is one, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the first bit is any one of the M bits. In this case, the terminal device determines the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, including: the terminal device sets the bit in the first sub-part as the first value The corresponding SRS resource is used as the first target SRS resource. Through this design, the terminal device can determine whether each SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset is invoked according to each bit of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field, when the SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset is transmitted When the performance is good, this method helps the terminal device to accurately determine the SRS resource with strong transmission performance used for uplink transmission.
在一种可选的设计中,第二子部分可以包括一个或多个比特,一个或多个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成第二子部分的一种比特状态,配置信息还用于指示从第二SRS资源子集中选取SRS资源的数量对应的第二子部分的比特状态。这种情况下,终端设备根据SRI指示域的第二子部分,从第二SRS资源子集中确定第二目标SRS资源,包括:终端设备根据SRI指示域的第二子部分的比特状态,从第二SRS资源子集中选取出比特状态对应的数量的SRS资源,作为第二目标SRS资源。通过该设计,终端设备能够根据SRI指示域中第二子部分的比特状态确定出第二SRS资源子集中被调用的SRS资源,当第二SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的传输性能较弱时,这种方式有助于终端设备准确确定出上行传输所使用的弱传输性能的SRS资源。In an optional design, the second subsection may include one or more bits, and a combination of the values of each bit in the one or more bits constitutes a bit state of the second subsection, and the configuration information It is also used to indicate the bit status of the second sub-part corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource subset. In this case, the terminal device determines the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field, including: A number of SRS resources corresponding to the bit states are selected from the two SRS resource subsets as the second target SRS resources. Through this design, the terminal device can determine the SRS resources called in the second SRS resource subset according to the bit state of the second sub-part in the SRI indication field. When the transmission performance of the SRS resources in the second SRS resource subset is weak, This approach helps the terminal equipment to accurately determine the SRS resources with weak transmission performance used for uplink transmission.
第二方面,本申请提供一种信息指示方法,该方法应用于网络设备,该方法包括:网络设备先根据终端设备发送探测参考信号SRS时使用的N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集,再向终端设备发送第一信息,在终端设备根据第一信息确定进行PUSCH传输使用的预编码后,接收终端设备使用该预编码进行PUSCH传输的上行数据。其中,K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源,第一信息中包括探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域,SRI指示域包括至少一个子部分,SRI指示域通过指示目标探测参考信号SRS资源,令终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,目标SRS资源为终端设备发送SRS时使用的N个SRS资源中的一个或多个,K、N为正整数,K≤N。In a second aspect, the present application provides an information indication method, the method is applied to a network device, and the method includes: the network device first obtains K SRS resource subsets according to N SRS resources used when the terminal device sends a sounding reference signal SRS, The first information is then sent to the terminal device, and after the terminal device determines the precoding used for PUSCH transmission according to the first information, the uplink data that the terminal device uses for PUSCH transmission is received. Wherein, each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes one or more SRS resources among the N SRS resources, the first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, and the SRI indication field includes at least one sub In part, the SRI indication field enables the terminal device to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission by indicating the target sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the target SRS resource is one or more of the N SRS resources used by the terminal device to send the SRS. K and N are positive integers, and K≤N.
上述设计通过网络设备预先划分SRS资源,并使用改变后的SRI指示域向终端设备指示目标SRS资源,只要N个SRS资源的划分方式合理(例如合理控制SRS资源子集的数量和每个SRS资源子集中SRS资源的数量),即使终端设备支持较多发射天线导致N的取值较大,也能够将网络设备发送的SRI指示域的比特位数压缩到N以下。相比于直接使用N个比特位指示N个SRS资源的方式来说,这种分组指示的方式有助于解决当终端设备支持较多发射天线时网络设备的SRI指示域过大的技术问题,也能够相应降低携带SRI指示域的DCI的数据量,提高DCI传输的可靠性。The above design divides the SRS resources in advance by the network equipment, and uses the changed SRI indication field to indicate the target SRS resources to the terminal equipment, as long as the division method of the N SRS resources is reasonable (for example, the number of SRS resource subsets and each SRS resource are reasonably controlled. The number of SRS resources in the subset), even if the terminal device supports more transmit antennas, resulting in a larger value of N, the number of bits in the SRI indication field sent by the network device can be compressed to less than N. Compared with the way of directly using N bits to indicate N SRS resources, this way of grouping indication helps to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field of the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas. The data amount of the DCI carrying the SRI indication field can also be correspondingly reduced, and the reliability of the DCI transmission can be improved.
在一种可选的设计中,网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息之前,还根据N个SRS资 源得到K个SRS资源子集,并向终端设备发送配置信息,该配置信息用于指示K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源。如此,通过网络设备提前配置终端设备的K个SRS资源子集并通知给终端设备,有助于使网络设备和终端设备后续基于统一的配置执行基于非码本的传输操作,提高网络设备在SRI指示域中指示目标SRS资源的便捷性。In an optional design, before sending the first information to the terminal device, the network device also obtains K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources, and sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the K SRS resource subsets SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset of the SRS resource subset. In this way, the K SRS resource subsets of the terminal device are configured in advance by the network device and notified to the terminal device, which helps the network device and the terminal device to perform non-codebook-based transmission operations based on the unified configuration subsequently, and improves the SRI performance of the network device. The convenience of indicating the target SRS resource in the indication field.
在一种可选的设计中,当K大于或等于2,则至少一个子部分包括第一子部分和第二子部分,第一子部分用于终端设备从K个SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源子集,第二子部分用于终端设备从目标SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源。如此,通过将SRI指示域划分为两级指示结构,能够使用这两级指示结构从K个SRS资源子集中准确指示出目标SRS资源,该种指示方式与划分SRS资源的方式相对应,有助于在划分SRS资源的情况下保证终端设备正常向网络设备传输上行数据。In an optional design, when K is greater than or equal to 2, at least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, and the first subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS from the K SRS resource subsets Resource subset, the second subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset. In this way, by dividing the SRI indication field into a two-level indication structure, the two-level indication structure can be used to accurately indicate the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets. This indication method corresponds to the method of dividing the SRS resources, which helps In the case of dividing SRS resources, it is ensured that the terminal device normally transmits uplink data to the network device.
本申请实施例中,K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源可以有多种情况,例如:In the embodiment of the present application, the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets may be in various situations, for example:
在一种情况下,K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的传输性能强于预设传输性能。如此,网络设备能够从传输性能较强的SRS资源中选择目标SRS资源,从而目标SRS资源的传输性能较好,有助于提高终端设备上行传输的效率。In one case, the transmission performance of the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets is stronger than the preset transmission performance. In this way, the network device can select the target SRS resource from the SRS resources with stronger transmission performance, so that the transmission performance of the target SRS resource is better, which helps to improve the efficiency of the uplink transmission of the terminal device.
在另一种情况下,K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源与其他终端设备的波束干扰概率小于预设概率。如此,网络设备选择出的目标SRS资源也大概率不会和其它终端设备发生波束碰撞,从而终端设备使用目标SRS资源确定的预编码进行上行传输的质量较好。In another case, the beam interference probability between the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets and other terminal equipments is less than a preset probability. In this way, the target SRS resource selected by the network device also has a high probability of not having beam collision with other terminal devices, so that the terminal device uses the precoding determined by the target SRS resource to perform uplink transmission with better quality.
在又一种情况下,K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的传输性能强于预设传输性能,且K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源与其他终端设备的波束干扰概率小于预设概率。如此,网络设备能够从传输性能较强且大概率不与其它终端设备发生波束碰撞的SRS资源中选择目标SRS资源,不仅有助于提高终端设备上行传输的效率,还能提高上行传输的质量。In yet another case, the transmission performance of the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets is stronger than the preset transmission performance, and the beam interference probability between the SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets and other terminal equipment is smaller than the preset probability . In this way, the network device can select the target SRS resource from the SRS resources with strong transmission performance and no beam collision with other terminal devices, which not only helps to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission of the terminal device, but also improves the quality of uplink transmission.
在一种可选的设计中,K个SRS资源子集的任意两个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量相同。这种情况下,还可以通过高层信令配置或预定义K的取值和每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量,如此,终端设备能够根据这些信息计算出第一比特位数和第二比特位数,有助于终端设备在接收到SRI指示域后根据第一比特位数获取第一子部分,以及根据第二比特位数获取第二子部分。这种方式通过终端设备自行计算得到第一比特位数和第二比特位数,而非由网络设备进行计算并传输,能够降低网络设备和终端设备传输的信令开销。In an optional design, the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same. In this case, the value of K and the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset can also be configured or pre-defined through high-level signaling. In this way, the terminal device can calculate the first number of bits and the first number of bits according to the information. The two-bit number is helpful for the terminal device to obtain the first subsection according to the first bit number and obtain the second subsection according to the second bit number after receiving the SRI indication field. In this way, the first bit number and the second bit number are calculated by the terminal device itself, instead of being calculated and transmitted by the network device, which can reduce the signaling overhead of transmission by the network device and the terminal device.
在一种可选的设计中,还可以通过高层信令配置或预定义第一比特位数和第二比特位数,其中,第一比特位数用于终端设备从SRI指示域中确定出第一子部分,第二比特位数用于终端设备从SRI指示域中确定出第二子部分。如此,通过高层信令配置或预定义终端设备对应的第一比特位数和第二比特位数,使得终端设备上行传输所使用的相关参数受到统一管理,从而更符合标准流程。In an optional design, the first number of bits and the second number of bits may also be configured or predefined through high-level signaling, where the first number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the number of bits from the SRI indication field. A subsection, the second bit number is used for the terminal device to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field. In this way, the first bit number and the second bit number corresponding to the terminal device are configured by high-level signaling or pre-defined, so that the relevant parameters used in the uplink transmission of the terminal device are managed in a unified manner, thereby more conforming to the standard process.
在一种可选的设计中,当K为1,则:SRI指示域的比特位数为L,L个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成L个比特的一种比特状态,L为小于N的正整数。这种情况下,网络设备根据N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集,包括:网络设备从N个SRS资源中选取L个SRS资源,构成SRS资源子集;L个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源对应L个比特的一种比特状态,SRI指示域的L个比特的比特状态用于终端设备从L个SRS资 源中确定目标SRS资源。如此,通过从N个SRS资源中选取L个SRS资源构成1个SRS资源子集,使得网络设备只需要从这L个SRS资源中选择目标SRS资源,因此SRI指示域对应的比特位数只需要指示出这L个SRS资源的组合状态即可,而无需指示出N个SRS资源的全部组合状态,这种方式可以降低SRI指示域的比特位数。In an optional design, when K is 1, then: the number of bits in the SRI indication field is L, and a combination of the values of each bit in the L bits constitutes a bit state of the L bits, L is a positive integer less than N. In this case, the network device obtains K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources, including: the network device selects L SRS resources from the N SRS resources to form an SRS resource subset; one of the L SRS resources or Multiple SRS resources correspond to a bit state of L bits, and the bit state of L bits in the SRI indication field is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources. In this way, one SRS resource subset is formed by selecting L SRS resources from N SRS resources, so that the network device only needs to select the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources, so the number of bits corresponding to the SRI indication field only needs to be It is only necessary to indicate the combined state of the L SRS resources, instead of indicating all the combined states of the N SRS resources, in this way, the number of bits of the SRI indication field can be reduced.
在一种可选的设计中,当K为2,则:配置信息用于指示M,M用于终端设备将N个SRS资源划分至第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集中,第一SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的M个SRS资源,第二SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中除M个SRS资源以外的N-M个SRS资源,M为小于N的正整数。这种情况下,至少一个子部分可以包括第一子部分和第二子部分,第一子部分用于终端设备从第一SRS资源子集中确定出第一目标SRS资源,第二子部分用于终端设备从第二SRS资源子集中确定出第二目标SRS资源,第一目标SRS资源和第二目标SRS资源构成目标SRS资源。如此,通过网络设备向终端设备通知M,使得终端设备能够预先根据M划分得到2个SRS资源子集,有助于后续接收到SRI指示域时从2个SRS资源子集中准确确定出目标SRS资源。且,这种指示方式使得网络设备能够从2个SRS资源子集中分别选择出部分SRS资源来构成目标SRS资源,而无需只从1个SRS资源子集中选择全部的目标SRS资源,从而有助于提高网络设备选择SRS资源的均衡性。In an optional design, when K is 2, the configuration information is used to indicate M, and M is used by the terminal equipment to divide the N SRS resources into the first SRS resource subset and the second SRS resource subset, and the first One SRS resource subset includes M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, and the second SRS resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where M is a positive integer less than N. In this case, at least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used for The terminal device determines the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset, and the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource constitute the target SRS resource. In this way, the network device notifies the terminal device of M, so that the terminal device can obtain 2 SRS resource subsets by dividing according to M in advance, which helps to accurately determine the target SRS resource from the 2 SRS resource subsets when the SRI indication field is subsequently received. . Moreover, this indication method enables the network device to select part of the SRS resources from the two SRS resource subsets respectively to form the target SRS resource, instead of only selecting all the target SRS resources from one SRS resource subset, thereby helping Improve the balance of network equipment selecting SRS resources.
在一种可选的设计中,第一SRS资源子集中包括的M个SRS资源为N个SRS资源按照传输性能由强到弱排列的前M个SRS资源,第二SRS资源子集中包括的N-M个SRS资源为N个SRS资源按照传输性能由强到弱排列的后N-M个SRS资源。通过该设计,网络设备能够按照SRS资源的传输性能的强弱情况进行SRS资源的调度,既能有助于网络设备尽可能调度更多的强传输性能的SRS资源,又能在强传输性能的SRS资源存在波束碰撞时让网络设备调度弱传输性能的SRS资源,从而能够兼顾调度强传输性能的SRS资源和规避其它波束干扰的能力,便于后续终端设备以较好的上行传输能力传输不被其它终端设备的波束干扰的上行数据。In an optional design, the M SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset are the first M SRS resources in which the N SRS resources are arranged in descending order of transmission performance, and the NM SRS resources included in the second SRS resource subset The SRS resources are the last NM SRS resources in which the N SRS resources are arranged in descending order of transmission performance. Through this design, the network device can schedule the SRS resources according to the strength of the transmission performance of the SRS resources, which not only helps the network device to schedule more SRS resources with strong transmission performance as much as possible, but also can schedule SRS resources with strong transmission performance. When SRS resources have beam collisions, network equipment can schedule SRS resources with weak transmission performance, so that both the ability to schedule SRS resources with strong transmission performance and the ability to avoid interference from other beams can be taken into account, which is convenient for subsequent terminal equipment to transmit with better uplink transmission ability. Uplink data of the beam interference of the terminal equipment.
在一种可选的设计中,第一子部分的长度为M比特,M比特中的每个比特对应M个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,当M比特中的第一比特的取值为第一值时,指示使用第一比特对应的SRS资源确定PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,第一比特为M比特中的任一比特。这种情况下,M个比特的比特状态用于终端设备将第一子部分中取值为第一值的比特位对应的SRS资源作为第一目标SRS资源。通过该设计,第一子部分能够指示出第一SRS资源子集中的每个SRS资源是否被调用,当第一SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的传输性能较好时,这种方式有助于终端设备准确确定出上行传输所使用的强传输性能的SRS资源。In an optional design, the length of the first sub-part is M bits, and each bit in the M bits corresponds to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, when the value of the first bit in the M bits is the th When the value is one, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the first bit is any one of the M bits. In this case, the bit state of the M bits is used by the terminal device to use the SRS resource corresponding to the bit value of the first value in the first subsection as the first target SRS resource. Through this design, the first subsection can indicate whether each SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset is invoked. When the transmission performance of the SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset is good, this method is helpful for the terminal The device accurately determines the SRS resources with strong transmission performance used for uplink transmission.
在一种可选的设计中,第二子部分包括一个或多个比特,一个或多个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成第二子部分的一种比特状态。这种情况下,配置信息还用于指示从第二SRS资源子集中选取SRS资源的数量对应的第二子部分的比特状态;SRI指示域的第二子部分的比特状态用于终端设备从第二SRS资源子集中选取出第二目标SRS资源。通过该设计,第二子部分的比特状态能够用于确定出第二SRS资源子集中被调用的SRS资源,当第二SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的传输性能较弱时,这种方式有助于终端设备准确确定出上行传输所使用的弱传输性能的SRS资源。In an optional design, the second subsection includes one or more bits, and a combination of values of each bit in the one or more bits constitutes a bit state of the second subsection. In this case, the configuration information is also used to indicate the bit status of the second subsection corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource subset; the bit status of the second subsection of the SRI indication field is used for The second target SRS resource is selected from the two SRS resource subsets. Through this design, the bit state of the second sub-part can be used to determine the SRS resources called in the second SRS resource subset, which is helpful when the transmission performance of the SRS resources in the second SRS resource subset is weak. The terminal equipment accurately determines the SRS resources with weak transmission performance used for uplink transmission.
第三方面,本申请提供一种信息指示装置,该装置可以为终端设备,该装置包括:In a third aspect, the present application provides an information indicating device, the device may be a terminal device, and the device includes:
收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一信息,第一信息中可以包括探测参考信号资 源标识SRI指示域。其中,SRI指示域可以包括至少一个子部分,SRI指示域通过指示目标探测参考信号SRS资源,令终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码。SRI指示域指示的目标SRS资源可以为终端设备发送SRS时使用的N个SRS资源中的一个或多个,N个SRS资源用于得到K个SRS资源子集,这K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中可以包括N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源。其中,K、N为正整数,K≤N;The transceiver unit is configured to receive first information sent by the network device, where the first information may include a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field. The SRI indication field may include at least one sub-section, and the SRI indication field enables the terminal device to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission by indicating the target sounding reference signal SRS resource. The target SRS resource indicated by the SRI indication field can be one or more of the N SRS resources used by the terminal device when sending SRS, and the N SRS resources are used to obtain K SRS resource subsets. Each SRS resource subset may include one or more SRS resources among the N SRS resources. Among them, K and N are positive integers, and K≤N;
处理单元,用于根据SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从K个SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源,并使用目标SRS资源确定终端设备PUSCH传输所使用的预编码。The processing unit is configured to determine the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI indication field, and use the target SRS resource to determine the precoding used by the terminal equipment for PUSCH transmission.
在一种可能的设计中,收发单元接收网络设备发送的第一信息之前,还接收网络设备发送的配置信息,该配置信息用于指示K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包含的SRS资源。In a possible design, before receiving the first information sent by the network device, the transceiver unit further receives configuration information sent by the network device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the information contained in each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets SRS resources.
在一种可能的设计中,当K大于或等于2,则至少一个子部分包括第一子部分和第二子部分,第一子部分用于指示K个SRS资源子集中的一个SRS资源子集,第二子部分用于指示一个SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源。这种情况下,处理单元可以先根据SRI指示域的第一子部分,从K个SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源子集,再根据SRI指示域的第二子部分,从目标SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源。In a possible design, when K is greater than or equal to 2, at least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, and the first subsection is used to indicate one SRS resource subset in the K SRS resource subsets , and the second sub-part is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in a subset of SRS resources. In this case, the processing unit may first determine the target SRS resource subset from the K SRS resource subsets according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, and then determine the target SRS resource subset from the target SRS resource subset according to the second sub-section of the SRI indication field Determine the target SRS resource.
在一种可能的设计中,K个SRS资源子集的任意两个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量相同,K的取值可以由高层信令配置或预定义。这种情况下,收发单元接收网络设备发送的配置信息之后,处理单元还可以根据K的取值,确定第一比特位数,以及根据每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量,确定第二比特位数。其中,第一比特位数用于从SRI指示域中确定出第一子部分,第二比特位数用于从SRI指示域中确定出第二子部分,第一比特位数和第二比特位数的和等于SRI指示域的比特位数。In a possible design, the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same, and the value of K may be configured or predefined by high-level signaling. In this case, after the transceiver unit receives the configuration information sent by the network device, the processing unit may also determine the first number of bits according to the value of K, and determine the first number of bits according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset. Two bits. Wherein, the first number of bits is used to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, the second number of bits is used to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field, the first number of bits and the second number of bits are The sum of the numbers is equal to the number of bits in the SRI indication field.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元也可以由高层信令配置或预定义第一比特位数和第二比特位数,其中,第一比特位数用于从SRI指示域中确定出第一子部分,第二比特位数用于从SRI指示域中确定出第二子部分。In a possible design, the processing unit may also be configured by high-level signaling or predefine the first number of bits and the second number of bits, where the first number of bits is used to determine the first number of bits from the SRI indication field Subpart, the second number of bits is used to determine the second subpart from the SRI indication field.
在一种可能的设计中,当K为1,则SRS资源子集中可以包括N个SRS资源中的L个SRS资源,L为小于N的正整数,SRI指示域的比特位数为L,L个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成L个比特的一种比特状态,且L个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源对应L个比特的一种比特状态。这种情况下,处理单元可以根据SRI指示域的L个比特的比特状态,从L个SRS资源中确定目标SRS资源。In a possible design, when K is 1, the SRS resource subset can include L SRS resources among the N SRS resources, L is a positive integer less than N, the number of bits of the SRI indication field is L, and L A combination of values of each of the bits constitutes a bit state of the L bits, and one or more SRS resources in the L SRS resources corresponds to a bit state of the L bits. In this case, the processing unit may determine the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources according to the bit state of the L bits of the SRI indication field.
在一种可能的设计中,当K为2,则K个SRS资源子集可以包括第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集,第一SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的M个SRS资源,第二SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中除M个SRS资源以外的N-M个SRS资源,M为小于N的正整数。对应的,至少一个子部分可以包括第一子部分和第二子部分,第一子部分用于指示第一SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源,第二子部分用于指示第二SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源。这种情况下,处理单元可以根据SRI指示域的第一子部分,从第一SRS资源子集中确定第一目标SRS资源,以及根据SRI指示域的第二子部分,从第二SRS资源子集中确定第二目标SRS资源,然后将第一目标SRS资源和第二目标SRS资源作为一个或多个目标SRS资源。In a possible design, when K is 2, the K SRS resource subsets may include a first SRS resource subset and a second SRS resource subset, and the first SRS resource subset includes M of the N SRS resources The second SRS resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where M is a positive integer smaller than N. Correspondingly, at least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used to indicate the second SRS One or more SRS resources in a subset of resources. In this case, the processing unit may determine the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, and determine the first target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field A second target SRS resource is determined, and then the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource are used as one or more target SRS resources.
在一种可能的设计中,配置信息可以用于指示M。这种情况下,收发单元接收网络设 备发送的配置信息之后,处理单元还可以根据M将N个SRS资源划分到第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集中。In one possible design, configuration information may be used to indicate M. In this case, after the transceiver unit receives the configuration information sent by the network device, the processing unit may further divide the N SRS resources into the first SRS resource subset and the second SRS resource subset according to M.
在一种可能的设计中,第一子部分的长度为M比特,M比特中的每个比特可以对应M个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,当M比特中的第一比特的取值为第一值时,指示使用第一比特对应的SRS资源确定PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,其中,第一比特可以为M比特中的任一比特。这种情况下,处理单元可以将第一子部分中取值为第一值的比特位对应的SRS资源作为第一目标SRS资源。In a possible design, the length of the first sub-part is M bits, and each bit in the M bits may correspond to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, when the value of the first bit in the M bits is the first When the value is one, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, where the first bit can be any one of the M bits. In this case, the processing unit may use the SRS resource corresponding to the bit whose value is the first value in the first subsection as the first target SRS resource.
在一种可能的设计中,第二子部分可以包括一个或多个比特,一个或多个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成第二子部分的一种比特状态。对应的,配置信息还可以指示从第二SRS资源子集中选取SRS资源的数量对应的第二子部分的比特状态。这种情况下,处理单元可以根据SRI指示域的第二子部分的比特状态,从第二SRS资源子集中选取出比特状态对应的数量的SRS资源,作为第二目标SRS资源。In a possible design, the second subsection may include one or more bits, and a combination of the values of each of the one or more bits constitutes a bit state of the second subsection. Correspondingly, the configuration information may further indicate the bit status of the second sub-part corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource sub-set. In this case, the processing unit may select the number of SRS resources corresponding to the bit states from the second SRS resource subset as the second target SRS resources according to the bit states of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
第四方面,本申请提供一种信息指示装置,该装置可以为网络设备,该装置包括:In a fourth aspect, the present application provides an information indicating device, the device may be a network device, and the device includes:
处理单元,用于根据终端设备发送探测参考信号SRS时使用的N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集。其中,K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中可以包括N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源,K、N为正整数,K≤N;The processing unit is configured to obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources used when the terminal equipment sends the sounding reference signal SRS. Wherein, each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets may include one or more SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where K and N are positive integers, and K≤N;
收发单元,用于向终端设备发送第一信息,并接收终端设备使用预编码进行PUSCH传输的上行数据。其中,第一信息中可以包括探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域,SRI指示域可以包括至少一个子部分,SRI指示域可以通过指示目标SRS资源,令终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,目标SRS资源可以为N个SRS资源中的一个或多个。The transceiver unit is configured to send the first information to the terminal device, and receive the uplink data that the terminal device uses for PUSCH transmission using precoding. The first information may include a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, the SRI indication field may include at least one sub-section, and the SRI indication field may indicate the target SRS resource to enable the terminal device to determine the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission. For precoding, the target SRS resource may be one or more of N SRS resources.
在一种可能的设计中,收发单元向终端设备发送第一信息之前,还可以向终端设备发送配置信息,配置信息用于指示K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源。In a possible design, before sending the first information to the terminal device, the transceiver unit may also send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets .
在一种可能的设计中,当K大于或等于2,则至少一个子部分可以包括第一子部分和第二子部分,第一子部分用于终端设备从K个SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源子集,第二子部分用于终端设备从目标SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源。In a possible design, when K is greater than or equal to 2, at least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, and the first subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS from the K SRS resource subsets Resource subset, the second subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset.
在一种可能的设计中,K个SRS资源子集的任意两个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量相同。这种情况下,处理单元还可以通过高层信令配置或预定义K的取值,以便于终端设备根据K的取值确定第一比特位数,以及根据和每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量确定第二比特位数,第一比特位数用于终端设备从SRI指示域中确定出第一子部分,第二比特位数用于终端设备从SRI指示域中确定出第二子部分。In a possible design, the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same. In this case, the processing unit may also configure or pre-define the value of K through high-level signaling, so that the terminal device can determine the first number of bits according to the value of K, and according to the SRS included in each SRS resource subset The number of resources determines the second number of bits, the first number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, and the second number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field. part.
在一种可能的设计中,K个SRS资源子集的任意两个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量相同。这种情况下,处理单元还可以通过高层信令配置或预定义第一比特位数和第二比特位数,第一比特位数用于终端设备从SRI指示域中确定出第一子部分,第二比特位数用于终端设备从SRI指示域中确定出第二子部分。In a possible design, the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same. In this case, the processing unit may also configure or predefine the first bit number and the second bit number through high-level signaling, and the first bit number is used by the terminal device to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, The second number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field.
在一种可能的设计中,当K为1,则SRI指示域的比特位数可以为L,L为小于N的正整数,L个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合可以构成L个比特的一种比特状态。这种情况下,处理单元可以从N个SRS资源中选取L个SRS资源,构成SRS资源子集,L个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源可以对应L个比特的一种比特状态,如此,SRI指示域 的L个比特的比特状态可以用于终端设备从L个SRS资源中确定目标SRS资源。In a possible design, when K is 1, the number of bits in the SRI indication field can be L, where L is a positive integer less than N, and a combination of the values of each of the L bits can constitute L A bit state of a bit. In this case, the processing unit may select L SRS resources from the N SRS resources to form a subset of SRS resources, and one or more SRS resources in the L SRS resources may correspond to a bit state of L bits, so that , the bit status of the L bits of the SRI indication field can be used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources.
在一种可能的设计中,当K为2,则配置信息可以用于指示M,M用于终端设备将N个SRS资源划分至第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集中,第一SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的M个SRS资源,第二SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中除M个SRS资源以外的N-M个SRS资源,M为小于N的正整数。这种情况下,至少一个子部分可以包括第一子部分和第二子部分,第一子部分用于终端设备从第一SRS资源子集中确定出第一目标SRS资源,第二子部分用于终端设备从第二SRS资源子集中确定出第二目标SRS资源,第一目标SRS资源和第二目标SRS资源构成目标SRS资源。In a possible design, when K is 2, the configuration information can be used to indicate M, where M is used by the terminal equipment to divide N SRS resources into the first SRS resource subset and the second SRS resource subset, the first The SRS resource subset includes M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, and the second SRS resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, where M is a positive integer less than N. In this case, at least one subsection may include a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used by the terminal device to determine the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used for The terminal device determines the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset, and the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource constitute the target SRS resource.
在一种可能的设计中,第一子部分的长度可以为M比特,M比特中的每个比特可以对应M个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,当M比特中的第一比特的取值为第一值时,指示使用第一比特对应的SRS资源确定PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,第一比特为M比特中的任一比特。这种情况下,M个比特的比特状态可以用于终端设备将第一子部分中取值为第一值的比特位对应的SRS资源作为第一目标SRS资源。In a possible design, the length of the first subsection may be M bits, and each bit in the M bits may correspond to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, when the value of the first bit in the M bits is When the value is the first, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the first bit is any one of the M bits. In this case, the bit state of the M bits may be used by the terminal device to use the SRS resource corresponding to the bit value of the first value in the first subsection as the first target SRS resource.
在一种可能的设计中,第二子部分可以包括一个或多个比特,一个或多个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成第二子部分的一种比特状态。这种情况下,配置信息还用于指示从第二SRS资源子集中选取SRS资源的数量对应的第二子部分的比特状态,SRI指示域的第二子部分的比特状态用于终端设备从第二SRS资源子集中选取出第二目标SRS资源。In a possible design, the second subsection may include one or more bits, and a combination of the values of each of the one or more bits constitutes a bit state of the second subsection. In this case, the configuration information is also used to indicate the bit state of the second sub-part corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource subset, and the bit state of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field is used for the terminal device to select from the first sub-part. The second target SRS resource is selected from the two SRS resource subsets.
第五方面,本申请提供一种信息指示装置,该装置可以包括处理器和通信接口,其中,通信接口可以用于接收来自上述第三方面的信息指示装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至处理器或将来自处理器的信号发送给上述第三方面的信息指示装置之外的其它通信装置,处理器可以通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如第一方面任一项的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides an information indicating device, which may include a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface may be used to receive and transmit signals from other communication devices other than the information indicating device of the third aspect. To the processor or to send the signal from the processor to other communication devices than the information indicating device of the third aspect, the processor can implement the method according to any one of the first aspect through logic circuits or executing code instructions.
第六方面,本申请提供一种信息指示装置,该装置可以包括处理器和通信接口,其中,通信接口用于接收来自上述第四方面的信息指示装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至处理器或将来自处理器的信号发送给上述第四方面的信息指示装置之外的其它通信装置,处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如第二方面任一项的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides an information indicating device, which may include a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the information indicating device in the fourth aspect and transmit to the information indicating device. The processor may send signals from the processor to other communication devices than the information indicating device of the fourth aspect, and the processor may implement the method according to any one of the second aspect through logic circuits or executing code instructions.
第七方面,本申请提供一种信息指示装置,该装置可以包括处理器,处理器与存储器相连,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得装置执行如上述第一方面任一项的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides an information indicating device, the device may include a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for executing the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device executes the above-mentioned The method of any one of the first aspects.
第八方面,本申请提供一种信息指示装置,该装置可以包括处理器,处理器与存储器相连,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得装置执行如上述第二方面任一项的方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides an information indicating device, the device may include a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for executing the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device executes as above The method of any one of the second aspect.
第九方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当计算机程序被运行时,实现如上述第一方面任一项的方法。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of the foregoing first aspects is implemented.
第十方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当计算机程序被运行时,实现如上述第二方面任一项的方法。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of the foregoing second aspects is implemented.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种芯片,该芯片可以包括处理器和接口,处理器用于通过接口读取指令,以执行如上述第一方面任一项所述的信息指示方法。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a chip, which may include a processor and an interface, where the processor is configured to read an instruction through the interface to execute the information indication method according to any one of the above-mentioned first aspect.
第十二方面,本申请提供一种芯片,该芯片可以包括处理器和接口,处理器用于通过接口读取指令,以执行如上述第二方面任一项所述的信息指示方法。In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a chip, which may include a processor and an interface, where the processor is configured to read an instruction through the interface to execute the information indicating method according to any one of the second aspect above.
第十三方面,本申请提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品用于存储计算机 程序,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如上述第一方面任意所述的方法、或者执行上述第二方面任意所述的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product, which is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method described in any of the above-mentioned first aspect , or perform any method described in the second aspect above.
第十四方面,本申请提供一种系统,该系统可以包括终端设备和网络设备,其中,终端设备可以用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面中的任意一种方法,网络设备可以用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面中的任意一种方法。In a fourteenth aspect, the present application provides a system, the system may include a terminal device and a network device, wherein the terminal device may be used to execute the first aspect or any one of the methods in the first aspect, and the network device may be used to Perform any method of the second aspect or the second aspect above.
上述第三方面至第十四方面的有益效果,具体请参照上述第一方面和第二方面中相应设计可以达到的技术效果,这里不再重复赘述。For the beneficial effects of the third aspect to the fourteenth aspect, please refer to the technical effects that can be achieved by the corresponding designs in the first aspect and the second aspect, which will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1示例性示出本申请实施例适用的一种通信系统的系统架构示意图;FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a system architecture of a communication system to which an embodiment of the present application is applicable;
图2示例性示出一种基于非码本的上行传输场景示意图;2 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a non-codebook-based uplink transmission scenario;
图3示例性示出一种基于非码本的上行传输时序序列图;Fig. 3 exemplarily shows a non-codebook-based uplink transmission sequence diagram;
图4示例性地示出本申请实施例一提供的信息指示方法的流程示意图;FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;
图5示例性地示出本申请实施例二提供的信息指示方法的流程示意图;FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;
图6示例性地示出本申请实施例三提供的信息指示方法的流程示意图;FIG. 6 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;
图7示例性地示出本申请实施例提供的一种信息指示装置的结构示意图;FIG. 7 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of an information indicating device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8示例性地示出本申请实施例提供的另一种信息指示装置的结构示意图;FIG. 8 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of another information indicating device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9示例性地示出本申请实施例提供的又一种信息指示装置的结构示意图。FIG. 9 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of another information indicating apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述,所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. The described embodiments are only a part of the embodiments of the present application, rather than all the embodiments.
图1示例性示出本申请实施例适用的一种通信系统100的系统架构示意图。如图1所示的系统架构包括网络设备110和至少一个终端设备,例如终端设备101、终端设备102、终端设备103、终端设备104、终端设备105和终端设备106。应理解,本申请实施例对系统架构中网络设备的数量、终端设备的数量不作限定,而且本申请实施例所适用的系统架构中除了包括网络设备和终端设备以外,还可以包括其它设备,如核心网设备、无线中继设备和无线回传设备等,对此本申请实施例也不作限定。以及,本申请实施例中的网络设备可以将所有的功能集成在一个独立的物理设备,也可以将功能分布在多个独立的物理设备上,对此本申请实施例也不作限定。此外,本申请实施例中的终端设备可以通过无线方式与网络设备连接。FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a system architecture of a communication system 100 to which the embodiments of the present application are applied. The system architecture shown in FIG. 1 includes a network device 110 and at least one terminal device, such as terminal device 101 , terminal device 102 , terminal device 103 , terminal device 104 , terminal device 105 , and terminal device 106 . It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of network devices and the number of terminal devices in the system architecture, and the system architecture to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable may include, in addition to network devices and terminal devices, other devices, such as Core network equipment, wireless relay equipment, wireless backhaul equipment, etc., are also not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Moreover, the network device in the embodiment of the present application may integrate all functions in an independent physical device, or may distribute the functions on multiple independent physical devices, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. In addition, the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be connected to the network device in a wireless manner.
可以理解的,图1所示意出的终端设备105、终端设备104和终端设备106也可以构成一个通信系统。当信息指示方法应用于该通信系统,则终端设备105相当于网络设备,可以实现本申请实施例中网络设备所执行的操作,终端设备104和终端设备106相当于终端设备,可以实现本申请实施例中终端设备所执行的操作。It can be understood that the terminal device 105, the terminal device 104 and the terminal device 106 shown in FIG. 1 may also constitute a communication system. When the information indication method is applied to the communication system, the terminal device 105 is equivalent to a network device and can implement the operations performed by the network device in the embodiments of the present application. The terminal device 104 and the terminal device 106 are equivalent to terminal devices and can implement the implementation of the present application. The operation performed by the terminal device in the example.
本申请实施例的通信系统可以是指各种通信系统,例如:5G(或者称为新无线(new radio,NR))通信系统、6G通信系统、长期演进(long term evolution,简称LTE)系统、全球移动通讯(global system of mobile communication,简称GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,简称CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple  access,简称WCDMA)通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,简称GPRS)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,简称FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,简称TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,简称UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,简称WiMAX)通信系统等,当然也可以为其它非授权频段的通信系统,不作限定。The communication system in this embodiment of the present application may refer to various communication systems, such as: 5G (or called new radio (NR)) communication system, 6G communication system, long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE for short) system, Global system of mobile communication (GSM) system, code division multiple access (CDMA) system, wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) general packet radio service ( general packet radio service (GPRS) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS) ), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX for short) communication system, etc., of course, it can also be a communication system in other unlicensed frequency bands, which is not limited.
下面先对本申请实施例涉及到的术语以及相关技术进行相关介绍。The terms and related technologies involved in the embodiments of the present application are first introduced below.
1、终端设备。1. Terminal equipment.
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音和/或数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备(user equipment,UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)终端设备、车到万物(vehicle to everything,V2X)终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)终端设备、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。例如,可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话),具有移动终端设备的计算机,便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的移动装置等。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、等设备。还包括受限设备,例如功耗较低的设备,或存储能力有限的设备,或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)、传感器、全球定位系统(global positioning system,GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。The terminal device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, for example, may include a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem. The terminal equipment may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN. The terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device (D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle to everything (V2X) terminal equipment , Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber) station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user Agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc. For example, these may include mobile telephones (or "cellular" telephones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer-embedded mobile devices, and the like. For example, personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistants), PDA), etc. Also includes constrained devices, such as devices with lower power consumption, or devices with limited storage capacity, or devices with limited computing power, etc. For example, it includes information sensing devices such as barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), and laser scanners.
2、网络设备。2, network equipment.
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以包括多种类型,例如包括接入网(access network,AN)设备,例如基站(例如,接入点),可以是指接入网中在空口通过一个或多个小区与无线终端设备通信的设备。基站可用于将收到的空中帧与网际协议(IP)分组进行相互转换,作为终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器,其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。例如包括路测单元(road side unit,RSB),RSB可以是支持V2X应用的固定基础设施实体,可以与支持V2X应用的其他实体交换消息。网络设备还可协调对空口的属性管理。例如,网络设备可以包括LTE系统或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB,evolutional Node B),或者也可以包括第五代移动通信技术(the 5 th generation,5G)新无线(new radio,NR)系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB)或者也可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network,Cloud RAN)系统中的集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),本申请实施例并不限定。 The network devices in the embodiments of the present application may include multiple types, for example, including access network (access network, AN) devices, such as base stations (eg, access points), which may refer to the access network through an air interface through one or more A device that communicates with a wireless terminal device in a cell. The base station may be used to convert received air frames to and from Internet Protocol (IP) packets and act as a router between the terminal device and the rest of the access network, which may include the IP network. For example, it includes a road side unit (road side unit, RSB). The RSB may be a fixed infrastructure entity supporting V2X applications, and may exchange messages with other entities supporting V2X applications. The network device can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface. For example, the network equipment may include an LTE system or an evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A), or may also include fifth generation mobile The next generation node B ( gNB ) in the new radio (NR) system of the communication technology (the 5th generation, 5G) may also include the cloud radio access network (Cloud RAN) A centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in the system are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
3、MIMO技术和预编码。3. MIMO technology and precoding.
从理论上来看,MIMO技术通过多天线的空间复用能成倍地增加系统容量,但实际上并非如此。例如,2*2MIMO系统容量实际上是2*2MIMO理论系统容量小于两倍的SISO 系统容量,即2SISO系统容量。这是由于系统容量增加的同时信道间影响相应增大而导致的,而信道间影响主要由信道矩阵中信道的相关性所造成。因此,在接收端对信道矩阵进行评估时,还需要执行消除信道间影响的操作。然而,为了最大化增加MIMO系统容量,接收端需要对每个信道都进行均衡地处理评估,例如对于SISO系统,接收端只需要均衡地处理评估一个信道即可,而对于一个2*2MIMO系统,接收端则需要均衡地处理评估4个信道。显然地,这种方式不仅会增加接收端对信号的处理难度,还会由于接收端需要将多个信道相关性的评估结果反馈给发射端,导致系统开销增大。In theory, MIMO technology can exponentially increase system capacity through spatial multiplexing of multiple antennas, but this is not the case in practice. For example, the capacity of the 2*2MIMO system is actually the capacity of the SISO system that is less than twice the theoretical system capacity of the 2*2MIMO, that is, the capacity of the 2SISO system. This is caused by the corresponding increase in the inter-channel influence as the system capacity increases, and the inter-channel influence is mainly caused by the correlation of the channels in the channel matrix. Therefore, when evaluating the channel matrix at the receiving end, it is also necessary to perform an operation to eliminate the influence between channels. However, in order to maximize the capacity of a MIMO system, the receiving end needs to process and evaluate each channel in a balanced manner. For example, for a SISO system, the receiving end only needs to process and evaluate one channel in a balanced manner, while for a 2*2MIMO system, The receiving end needs to process and evaluate 4 channels in a balanced manner. Obviously, this method not only increases the difficulty of signal processing by the receiver, but also increases the system overhead because the receiver needs to feed back evaluation results of multiple channel correlations to the transmitter.
为了解决上述问题,预编码(Precoding)应运而生。预编码的目的就是在最大化提升MIMO系统容量的同时,降低接收端对信号的处理难度,减少系统开销。预编码通过发射端利用信道状态对信号进行动态的功率控制和相位调节,通过改变信号能量在空间中的分布,将某些特定位置的能量变强,提升该位置发射端的信号传输性能及系统容量,如此,接收端能够接收到发射端发送的“纯净”的不受其它发射端干扰的信号。且,这种方式由发射端先进行预处理再发送给接收端,使得接收端不用再执行上述均衡处理评估各个信道的复杂过程,也无需将多个信道相关性的评估结果反馈给发射端,从而还可以降低接收端对信号的处理难度和系统开销。In order to solve the above problems, precoding (Precoding) came into being. The purpose of precoding is to maximize the capacity of the MIMO system, reduce the difficulty of signal processing at the receiving end, and reduce system overhead. Precoding uses the channel state at the transmitter to dynamically control the power and phase of the signal. By changing the distribution of signal energy in space, the energy of some specific locations becomes stronger, and the signal transmission performance and system capacity of the transmitter at that location are improved. , so that the receiver can receive the "pure" signal sent by the transmitter without interference from other transmitters. Moreover, in this way, the transmitting end performs preprocessing first and then sends it to the receiving end, so that the receiving end does not need to perform the above-mentioned complex process of equalizing processing to evaluate each channel, and does not need to feed back the evaluation results of multiple channel correlations to the transmitting end. Therefore, the difficulty and system overhead of signal processing at the receiving end can also be reduced.
4、基于非码本的上行传输。4. Uplink transmission based on non-codebook.
在NR系统中,按照预编码方式的不同,上行传输主要可以分为两种类型:CB传输和NCB传输。终端设备在CB传输中所使用的预编码由网络设备通过码本通知给终端设备,而在NCB传输中所使用的预编码则是由终端设备自己计算得到。In the NR system, according to different precoding methods, uplink transmission can be mainly divided into two types: CB transmission and NCB transmission. The precoding used by the terminal equipment in the CB transmission is notified to the terminal equipment by the network equipment through the codebook, while the precoding used in the NCB transmission is calculated by the terminal equipment itself.
本申请中的方案主要应用于NCB传输。下面先对NCB传输的具体实现过程进行介绍。The solution in this application is mainly applied to NCB transmission. The specific implementation process of NCB transmission is first introduced below.
图2示例性示出一种NCB传输的场景示意图,图3示例性示出一种NCB传输的时序序列图,参照图2和图3所示,基于非码本的上行传输过程包括:FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a scenario of NCB transmission, and FIG. 3 exemplarily shows a timing sequence diagram of NCB transmission. Referring to FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 , the non-codebook-based uplink transmission process includes:
步骤301,网络设备为终端设备配置基于NCB传输的N个SRS资源。Step 301, the network device configures N SRS resources based on NCB transmission for the terminal device.
在一种可选地实施方式中,网络设备可以为终端设备配置一个或多个SRS资源集合,一个或多个SRS资源集合包括但不限于:波束管理集合、码本集合、非码本集合和天线切换集合。其中,每个SRS资源集合中可以包括至少一个SRS资源,每个SRS资源集合中包括的SRS资源的数量可以根据终端设备的能力来决定,例如当终端设备支持的天线数量越多,则每个SRS资源集合中包括的SRS资源的数量可以越多。本申请实施例中,各个SRS资源集合中的SRS资源可以对应为不同用途,例如波束管理集合中的SRS资源用于执行上行波束训练,码本集合中的SRS资源用于执行基于码本的信道状态信息获取、非码本集合中的SRS资源用于执行基于非码本的信道状态信息获取,天线切换集合中的SRS资源用于执行天线切换功能。In an optional implementation manner, the network device may configure one or more SRS resource sets for the terminal device, and the one or more SRS resource sets include but are not limited to: a beam management set, a codebook set, a non-codebook set, and Antenna switching set. Wherein, each SRS resource set may include at least one SRS resource, and the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource set may be determined according to the capability of the terminal device. For example, when the number of antennas supported by the terminal device is more, each The number of SRS resources included in the SRS resource set may be larger. In this embodiment of the present application, the SRS resources in each SRS resource set may correspond to different purposes, for example, the SRS resources in the beam management set are used to perform uplink beam training, and the SRS resources in the codebook set are used to perform codebook-based channel The state information acquisition and the SRS resources in the non-codebook set are used to perform non-codebook-based channel state information acquisition, and the SRS resources in the antenna switching set are used to perform the antenna switching function.
本申请中的信息指示方法适用于非码本集合中的各个SRS资源。因此,为了便于描述,本申请的下列实施例将非码本集合中的SRS资源直接称为SRS资源。也就是说,下文中出现的“SRS资源”均可以替换为“非码本集合中的SRS资源”。The information indication method in this application is applicable to each SRS resource in the non-codebook set. Therefore, for the convenience of description, the SRS resources in the non-codebook set are directly referred to as SRS resources in the following embodiments of the present application. That is to say, "SRS resources" appearing in the following can be replaced with "SRS resources in the non-codebook set".
本申请实施例中,网络设备为终端设备配置N个SRS资源,具体可以是指网络设备为终端设备配置用于传输SRS的N个上行资源,例如时域资源和频域资源等。其中,N可以取小于或等于终端设备的发射天线个数的任意正整数。且,N个SRS资源的命名可以由本领域技术人员根据经验进行设置,例如当前最常用的一种命名方式为:将N个SRS资源命名为SRS 0~SRS N-1。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device configures N SRS resources for the terminal device, which may specifically refer to that the network device configures the terminal device with N uplink resources for transmitting SRS, such as time domain resources and frequency domain resources. Wherein, N can be any positive integer less than or equal to the number of transmit antennas of the terminal device. Moreover, the naming of the N SRS resources can be set by those skilled in the art according to experience, for example, a currently most commonly used naming manner is: naming the N SRS resources as SRS 0 to SRS N-1.
步骤302,网络设备向终端设备发送下行参考信号(downlink-reference signal,DL-RS)。 Step 302, the network device sends a downlink reference signal (downlink-reference signal, DL-RS) to the terminal device.
本申请实施例中,DL-RS可以是指小区特定的参考信号或信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information,CSI-RS)。这些DL-RS在整个频带内发送,并独立于分配给终端设备的资源块(resource block,RB),可用于CSI测量。In this embodiment of the present application, the DL-RS may refer to a cell-specific reference signal or a channel state information reference signal (channel state information, CSI-RS). These DL-RSs are transmitted in the entire frequency band and are independent of resource blocks (RBs) allocated to terminal devices, and can be used for CSI measurement.
步骤303,终端设备对接收到的DL-RS进行下行信道测量,获取下行信道的CSI。Step 303, the terminal device performs downlink channel measurement on the received DL-RS to obtain the CSI of the downlink channel.
本申请实施例中,终端设备可以根据DL-RS来估计网络设备的发射天线和终端设备的接收天线之间的信道状态信息,以计算出下行信道的相关参数。其中,相关参数可以包括但不限于信道质量指示(channel quality information,CQI)、参考信号接收功率(reference signal reception power,RSRP)和信道状态信息(channelstateinformation,CSI)等。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may estimate the channel state information between the transmit antenna of the network device and the receive antenna of the terminal device according to the DL-RS, so as to calculate the relevant parameters of the downlink channel. The relevant parameters may include, but are not limited to, channel quality indication (channel quality information, CQI), reference signal reception power (reference signal reception power, RSRP), channel state information (channel state information, CSI), and the like.
步骤304,终端设备根据下行信道的CSI,计算出N个上行传输所使用的波束(beam)。Step 304, the terminal device calculates the beams (beams) used for N uplink transmissions according to the CSI of the downlink channel.
本申请实施例中,下行信道的CSI和上行信道的CSI中通常包含大量相同或相近的信息。例如,当网络设备和终端设备通过时分双工(time-duplexing division,TDD)方式工作,则上行信道的接收天线可以对应为下行信道的发送天线,上行信道的发送天线可以对应为下行信道的接收天线,上行信道和下行信道位于相同频率,上行信道和下行信道之间具有互易性(reciprocity)。这种情况下,上行信道的协方差矩阵中的信道元素等同于下行信道的协方差矩阵中的信道元素,只是这些信道元素按照天线的对应关系分别排列在上行信道的协方差矩阵和下行信道的协方差矩阵中,使得这两个协方差矩阵呈现出转置关系。In the embodiment of the present application, the CSI of the downlink channel and the CSI of the uplink channel usually contain a large amount of the same or similar information. For example, when the network device and the terminal device work in a time-duplexing division (TDD) mode, the receiving antenna of the uplink channel may correspond to the transmitting antenna of the downlink channel, and the transmitting antenna of the uplink channel may correspond to the receiving antenna of the downlink channel The antenna, the uplink channel and the downlink channel are located at the same frequency, and there is reciprocity between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. In this case, the channel elements in the covariance matrix of the uplink channel are equivalent to the channel elements in the covariance matrix of the downlink channel, except that these channel elements are respectively arranged in the covariance matrix of the uplink channel and the covariance matrix of the downlink channel according to the corresponding relationship of the antenna. In the covariance matrix, the two covariance matrices exhibit a transposed relationship.
根据上述内容,终端设备在测量得到下行信道的CSI后,可以先从下行信道的CSI中确定出下行信道的协方差矩阵,再根据上述转置关系准确地获取到上行信道的协方差矩阵。进一步地,终端设备可以按照如下公式(1.1)对上行信道的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解:According to the above content, after measuring and obtaining the CSI of the downlink channel, the terminal device can first determine the covariance matrix of the downlink channel from the CSI of the downlink channel, and then accurately obtain the covariance matrix of the uplink channel according to the above-mentioned transposition relationship. Further, the terminal device can perform singular value decomposition on the covariance matrix of the uplink channel according to the following formula (1.1):
H U=UΛV H……(1.1) H U =UΛV H ... (1.1)
其中,公式(1.1)中的各个参数对应为:Among them, each parameter in formula (1.1) corresponds to:
H U为上行信道的协方差矩阵; H U is the covariance matrix of the uplink channel;
U和V为酉矩阵,V的前N列对应为N个上行传输所使用的波束;U and V are unitary matrices, and the first N columns of V correspond to the beams used by N uplink transmissions;
Λ为广义对角矩阵,Λ的每个对角线元素都为正值,且各个对角线元素按照从大到小的顺序依次排列。例如Λ的第r行第r列的对角线元素大于第r+1行第r+1列的对角线元素,r为大于0的正整数。Λ is a generalized diagonal matrix, each diagonal element of Λ is a positive value, and each diagonal element is arranged in order from large to small. For example, the diagonal elements of the rth row and the rth column of Λ are larger than the diagonal elements of the r+1th row and the r+1th column, and r is a positive integer greater than 0.
本申请实施例中,Λ的前N个对角线元素分别对应V的前N列,即N个波束,这N个波束以其发送时所占用的资源命名,例如当N个SRS资源命名为SRS 0~SRS N-1时,这N个波束对应命名为beam 0~beam N-1。按照单用户(single user equipment,SU)假设,当Λ的对角线元素越大,则表示终端设备在无干扰的前提下使用该对角线元素对应的波束进行传输的性能越好。这种情况下,由于Λ的前N个对角线元素逐渐减小,因此前N个对角线元素所对应的N个波束的传输性能也逐渐变差。由此可知,虽然标准中未明确规定,但一般来说,SRS 0所对应的波束beam 0的传输性能最强,SRS 1所对应的波束beam 1的传输性能次之,……,SRS N-1所对应的波束beam N-1的传输性能最弱。In the embodiment of the present application, the first N diagonal elements of Λ correspond to the first N columns of V, that is, N beams, and the N beams are named after the resources occupied during transmission. For example, when the N SRS resources are named as When SRS 0~SRS N-1, the N beams are named beam 0~beam N-1 correspondingly. According to the assumption of single user equipment (SU), when the diagonal element of Λ is larger, it means that the terminal equipment has better transmission performance using the beam corresponding to the diagonal element under the premise of no interference. In this case, since the first N diagonal elements of Λ gradually decrease, the transmission performance of the N beams corresponding to the first N diagonal elements also gradually deteriorates. It can be seen from this that although the standard is not clearly specified, generally speaking, the transmission performance of beam 0 corresponding to SRS 0 is the strongest, and the transmission performance of beam 1 corresponding to SRS 1 is second, ..., SRS N- The beam N-1 corresponding to 1 has the weakest transmission performance.
步骤305,终端设备使用N个波束预编码SRS,将预编码后的SRS发送给网络设备。Step 305, the terminal device precodes the SRS using N beams, and sends the precoded SRS to the network device.
本申请实施例中,虽然理论上波束beam 0~beam N-1的传输性逐渐降低,但是网络设备可能会在相同的时频资源上调度多个终端设备,导致各个波束之间可能存在碰撞(即按照该波束发送信号可能会被其它发送信号所干扰)。而终端设备并不知道各个波束之间的真实碰撞情况,也就无法确定出beam 0~beam N-1中哪个波束或哪几个波束最好,从而无 法确定出自己要调用哪几个SRS资源。因此,终端设备还需要使用N个波束预编码SRS后发送给网络设备,并等待接收网络设备发送的指示,根据指示确定后续发送上行数据所使用的预编码。In this embodiment of the present application, although theoretically the transmission properties of beams beam 0 to beam N-1 gradually decrease, the network device may schedule multiple terminal devices on the same time-frequency resource, resulting in possible collisions between beams ( That is, the signal transmitted according to the beam may be interfered by other transmitted signals). However, the terminal device does not know the real collision situation between the beams, so it cannot determine which beam or beams in beam 0 to beam N-1 are the best, and thus cannot determine which SRS resources it wants to call. . Therefore, the terminal device also needs to use N beams to precode the SRS before sending it to the network device, wait for receiving an instruction sent by the network device, and determine the precoding used for subsequent uplink data transmission according to the instruction.
本申请实施例中,当终端设备支持多根发射天线时,终端设备可以同时传输一流或多流数据,这一流或多流数据是对待传输数据(例如SRS)进行划分得到,每流数据对应一个波束,每流数据对应的波束用于对该流数据进行加权(称为波束成型或波束赋形,beamforming),一流或多流数据对应的一个或多个波束构成本次传输的预编码。示例来说,假设SRS划分为两流数据x0和x1,本次传输的预编码如下式(1.2)所示:In the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports multiple transmit antennas, the terminal device can transmit one-stream or multi-stream data at the same time, and this stream or multi-stream data is obtained by dividing the data to be transmitted (for example, SRS), and each stream of data corresponds to one Beam, the beam corresponding to each stream of data is used to weight the stream data (called beamforming or beamforming, beamforming), and one or more beams corresponding to one stream or multiple streams of data constitute the precoding for this transmission. For example, assuming that the SRS is divided into two streams of data x0 and x1, the precoding for this transmission is shown in the following formula (1.2):
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000001
则该预编码中的三行数据[1,1]、[0,1]和[1,0]分别代表终端设备的3根发射天线,两列数据[1,0,1] T和[1,1,0] T分别代表2个波束。其中,第一个波束[1,0,1] T用于指示终端设备通过第一根发射天线和第三根发射天线发送SRS的第一流数据x0,第二个波束[1,1,0] T用于指示终端设备通过第一根发射天线和第二根发射天线发送SRS的第二流数据x1。 Then the three rows of data [1, 1], [0, 1] and [1, 0] in the precoding represent the three transmit antennas of the terminal device respectively, and the two columns of data [1, 0, 1] T and [1] , 1, 0] T represent 2 beams respectively. Among them, the first beam [1, 0, 1] T is used to instruct the terminal device to send the first stream data x0 of SRS through the first transmit antenna and the third transmit antenna, and the second beam [1, 1, 0] T is used to instruct the terminal device to send the second stream data x1 of the SRS through the first transmit antenna and the second transmit antenna.
本申请实施例中,当使用N个波束预编码SRS时,针对于每个波束,终端设备可以先使用该波束加权对应的数据流,再根据该波束对应的SRS资源将加权后的数据流发送给网络设备。相对于单流传输来说,多流传输能够提高一次上行传输的数据量,提高上行传输的频谱效率和峰值速率。In the embodiment of the present application, when using N beams to precode SRS, for each beam, the terminal device may first use the beam to weight the corresponding data stream, and then send the weighted data stream according to the SRS resource corresponding to the beam. to network equipment. Compared with single-stream transmission, multi-stream transmission can increase the data volume of one uplink transmission, and improve the spectral efficiency and peak rate of uplink transmission.
步骤306,网络设备根据预编码后的SRS进行信道估计,并计算出终端设备使用每个SRS资源时的上行传输速率,根据信道估计结果和N个SRS资源分别对应的上行传输速率,确定出目标SRS资源。Step 306, the network equipment performs channel estimation according to the precoded SRS, and calculates the uplink transmission rate when the terminal equipment uses each SRS resource, and determines the target according to the channel estimation result and the uplink transmission rates corresponding to the N SRS resources respectively. SRS resources.
需要说明的是,网络设备确定一个或多个目标SRS资源时所使用的信息可以包括但不限于信道估计结果和上行传输速率。It should be noted that the information used by the network device to determine one or more target SRS resources may include but not limited to channel estimation results and uplink transmission rates.
在一种可选地实施方式中,网络设备可以先根据其它终端设备在上行传输时所使用的SRS资源对应的波束,从当前终端设备的N个波束中排除掉可能会存在碰撞的波束,然后从不存在碰撞的波束中选择上行传输速率较好的一个或多个波束,将这一个或多个波束对应的一个或多个SRS资源作为目标SRS资源。如此,终端设备后续的上行传输与其它终端设备的上行传输发生波束碰撞的可能性较小,有助于提高信号传输的质量。且,终端设备还能够以较高的传输速率传输上行数据,从而还有助于提高上行传输的效率。In an optional implementation manner, the network device may first exclude the beams that may collide from the N beams of the current terminal device according to the beams corresponding to the SRS resources used by other terminal devices for uplink transmission, and then One or more beams with a better uplink transmission rate are selected from the beams without collision, and one or more SRS resources corresponding to the one or more beams are used as the target SRS resources. In this way, the possibility of beam collision between the subsequent uplink transmission of the terminal device and the uplink transmission of other terminal devices is less, which helps to improve the quality of signal transmission. Moreover, the terminal device can also transmit uplink data at a higher transmission rate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
步骤307,网络设备向终端设备发送下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI),DCI中携带有SRI指示域,SRI指示域用于指示目标SRS资源。 Step 307, the network device sends downlink control information (DCI) to the terminal device, the DCI carries an SRI indication field, and the SRI indication field is used to indicate the target SRS resource.
按照现有设计逻辑,N个SRS资源的每种组合情况可以对应SRI指示域的一种比特状态。例如,当N为2、N个SRS资源为SRS 0和SRS 1时,SRI指示域可以包括2个比特,这2个比特的比特状态按照这2个SRS资源的组合情况进行依次排列,如下表1所示:According to the existing design logic, each combination of N SRS resources may correspond to a bit state of the SRI indication field. For example, when N is 2 and the N SRS resources are SRS 0 and SRS 1, the SRI indication field can include 2 bits, and the bit states of these 2 bits are arranged in sequence according to the combination of the 2 SRS resources, as shown in the following table 1 shows:
SRI指示域的比特状态The bit status of the SRI indication field SRS资源的组合Combination of SRS resources
0000 SRS 0SRS 0
0101 SRS 1 SRS 1
1010 SRS 0和SRS 1SRS 0 and SRS 1
表1Table 1
在表1中,SRI指示域指示1个SRS资源可以包括2种情况,即SRS 0或SRS 1,SRI指示域指示2个SRS资源可以包括1种情况,即SRS 0和SRS 1,这3种情况依次对应比特状态00、01和10。In Table 1, the SRI indication field indicates that 1 SRS resource can include 2 cases, namely SRS 0 or SRS 1, and the SRI indication field indicates that 2 SRS resources can include 1 case, namely SRS 0 and SRS 1, these 3 kinds The cases correspond to bit states 00, 01, and 10 in turn.
按照现有设计逻辑,当终端设备存在N个SRS资源时,SRI指示域占用的比特位数可以按照如下公式(1.3)来确定:According to the existing design logic, when the terminal device has N SRS resources, the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field can be determined according to the following formula (1.3):
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000002
其中,公式(1.3)中的各个参数为:Among them, each parameter in formula (1.3) is:
L max为最大调度层数,用于限定终端设备能够同时传输的数据流的最大数量。L max的取值可以由网络设备通过高层信令配置给终端设备或预定义,一般不超过N,具体可以根据终端设备的硬件设备处理能力来确定。考虑到现阶段终端设备的硬件处理能力只能支持4流或4流以下的数据传输,因此本申请的下列实施例均以终端设备最大传输4流数据为例进行介绍。 L max is the maximum number of scheduling layers, which is used to limit the maximum number of data streams that the terminal device can transmit at the same time. The value of L max can be configured by the network device to the terminal device through high-layer signaling or predefined, and generally does not exceed N, which can be specifically determined according to the processing capability of the hardware device of the terminal device. Considering that the current hardware processing capability of the terminal device can only support data transmission of 4 streams or less, the following embodiments of the present application all take the terminal device transmitting data of 4 streams at most as an example for introduction.
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000003
是指从N个SRS资源中选择i个SRS资源的可能组合的数量;
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000003
Refers to the number of possible combinations of i SRS resources selected from N SRS resources;
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000004
为向上取整符号,用于得到不小于符号中间值的最小整数。
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000004
To round up the sign, used to get the smallest integer not less than the median value of the sign.
本申请实施例中,公式(1.3)用于对从N个SRS资源中选择出不超过min{L max,N}个SRS资源的可能组合的数量进行加和,并使SRI指示域占用的比特位数取值为比特状态大于或等于该加和数的最小值。这种情况下,SRI指示域能够指示出终端设备上行传输使用不大于N个SRS资源的任一种情况。 In the embodiment of the present application, formula (1.3) is used to add up the number of possible combinations of SRS resources that are not more than min{L max ,N} selected from N SRS resources, and make the bits occupied by the SRI indication field The number of bits is the minimum value of the bit state greater than or equal to the sum. In this case, the SRI indication field can indicate any situation in which the terminal equipment uses no more than N SRS resources for uplink transmission.
步骤308,终端设备使用SRI指示域所指示的目标SRS资源对应的波束预编码上行数据。Step 308, the terminal equipment precodes uplink data using the beam corresponding to the target SRS resource indicated by the SRI indication field.
步骤309,终端设备将预编码后的上行数据发送给网络设备。Step 309, the terminal device sends the precoded uplink data to the network device.
本申请实施例中,当SRI指示域只指示出一个目标SRS资源,则终端设备可以直接使用该目标SRS资源对应的波束预编码上行数据。当SRI指示域指示出两个或两个以上的目标SRS资源,则终端设备可以先将上行数据划分为两流或两流以上的子数据,再使用两个或两个以上的目标SRS资源分别加权两流或两流以上的子数据,最后根据对应的目标SRS资源将加权后的每流子数据发送出去。In the embodiment of the present application, when the SRI indication field only indicates one target SRS resource, the terminal device may directly use the beam corresponding to the target SRS resource to precode uplink data. When the SRI indication field indicates two or more target SRS resources, the terminal device can first divide the uplink data into sub-data of two or more streams, and then use the two or more target SRS resources respectively The sub-data of two streams or more are weighted, and finally the weighted sub-data of each stream is sent out according to the corresponding target SRS resource.
为了保证终端设备的上行传输能力不受限,大都会配置L max=N=发射天线数。这种情况下,按照公式(1.3),SRI指示域占用的比特数也刚好等于发射天线数。现阶段终端设备只能支持4个或更少的发射天线,因此对应的SRI指示域最多占用4比特。然而,随着5G标准的逐渐演进,未来终端设备会支持8个或更多的发射天线,而这会导致SRI指示域占用的比特数相应增大到8比特或大于8比特,从而极大地增加DCI的传输负担,降低DCI的传输可靠性。因此,5G标准演进须解决以支持8个发射天线为代表的更多发射天线的终端设备面临SRI指示域过大的问题。 In order to ensure that the uplink transmission capability of the terminal equipment is not limited, the metropolis configures L max =N=the number of transmit antennas. In this case, according to formula (1.3), the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field is also exactly equal to the number of transmit antennas. At this stage, the terminal equipment can only support 4 or less transmit antennas, so the corresponding SRI indication field occupies at most 4 bits. However, with the gradual evolution of the 5G standard, the terminal equipment will support 8 or more transmit antennas in the future, which will lead to a corresponding increase in the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field to 8 bits or more, thus greatly increasing The transmission burden of the DCI reduces the transmission reliability of the DCI. Therefore, the evolution of the 5G standard must solve the problem that the SRI indication field is too large for terminal equipment that supports more transmit antennas represented by 8 transmit antennas.
为了解决上述问题,在一种可选地实施方式中,可以配置:L max<N=发射天线数,如此,按照公式(1.3),由于min{L max,N}为L max(小于发射天线数),因此SRI指示域占用的比特数可以小于发射天线数。然而,这种实施方式实际上是以牺牲终端设备的上行传输能力为代价来降低SRI指示域占用的比特位数。例如,当需要将支持8个发射天线的终端设备对应的SRI指示域压缩至5比特以内,则该种实施方式会配置N为8,且配置 L max小于或等于5。由于现阶段的终端设备至多能传输4流数据,当配置L max小于4(例如1),则终端设备每次只能从8个SRS资源中选择出小于4个SRS资源得到上行传输的预编码,因此上行传输划分的数据流数小于4,这种传输方式没有充分利用到终端设备的最佳处理能力,会限制终端设备上行传输的峰值速率,不利于终端设备和网络设备之间通信的及时性。当配置L max大于或等于4(例如4),则终端设备每次会从8个SRS资源中选择出传输能力最强的4个波束对应的SRS资源得到上行传输的预编码,这样虽然能够提高上行传输能力,但是传输能力最强的4个波束可能会与其他终端设备的波束存在碰撞,导致终端设备传输的上行数据被其它终端设备发送的数据所干扰,影响终端设备与网络设备的通信质量。显然地,这种实施方式在提高终端设备的上行传输能力的同时,会降低终端设备规避其它终端设备的波束干扰的能力,无法实现同时提高终端设备的上行传输能力和规避其它终端设备的波束干扰的能力。 In order to solve the above problem, in an optional implementation, it can be configured: L max <N=the number of transmit antennas, so, according to formula (1.3), since min{L max ,N} is L max (less than the transmit antenna number), so the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field can be smaller than the number of transmit antennas. However, this implementation actually reduces the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field at the expense of the uplink transmission capability of the terminal device. For example, when the SRI indication field corresponding to a terminal device supporting 8 transmit antennas needs to be compressed to less than 5 bits, this embodiment will configure N to be 8, and configure L max to be less than or equal to 5. Since the terminal equipment at this stage can transmit at most 4 streams of data, when the configuration L max is less than 4 (for example, 1), the terminal equipment can only select less than 4 SRS resources from the 8 SRS resources each time to obtain the precoding for uplink transmission , so the number of data streams divided by the uplink transmission is less than 4. This transmission method does not fully utilize the best processing capability of the terminal device, which will limit the peak rate of the terminal device’s uplink transmission, which is not conducive to the timely communication between the terminal device and the network device. sex. When the configuration L max is greater than or equal to 4 (for example, 4), the terminal equipment will select the SRS resources corresponding to the 4 beams with the strongest transmission capability from the 8 SRS resources each time to obtain the precoding of the uplink transmission. Uplink transmission capability, but the 4 beams with the strongest transmission capability may collide with the beams of other terminal equipment, causing the uplink data transmitted by the terminal equipment to be interfered by the data sent by other terminal equipment, affecting the communication quality between the terminal equipment and the network equipment . Obviously, while improving the uplink transmission capability of the terminal device, this implementation will reduce the capability of the terminal device to avoid the beam interference of other terminal devices, and it is impossible to simultaneously improve the uplink transmission capability of the terminal device and avoid the beam interference of other terminal devices. Ability.
在另一种可选地实施方式中,可以配置:L max=N<发射天线数,如此,按照公式(1.3),由于min{L max,N}为N或L max(小于发射天线数),因此SRI指示域占用的比特数也可以小于发射天线数。然而,这种方式实际上是以减少终端设备可选的波束为代价来降低SRI指示域占用的比特位数。例如,当需要将支持8个发射天线的终端设备对应的SRI指示域压缩至5比特以内,则该种实施方式会配置N和L max为5,这种情况下,终端设备只能提供5个传输性能较好的波束对应的SRS资源供网络设备选择,如果网络设备想调度终端设备传输4流数据,而这5个SRS资源中存在2个SRS资源的波束与另一终端设备发送的信号存在大概率碰撞,则:为了保持终端设备的上行传输能力,网络设备可以强行调度4流数据,而这样会使终端设备调度的至少1流数据与其它终端设备发送的信号碰撞,导致终端设备无法规避其它终端设备的波束干扰;为了规避波束干扰,网络设备只能调度剩余的3流数据,而这样又会降低终端设备的上行传输能力。由此可知,这种实施方式也无法同时提高终端设备的上行传输能力和规避其它终端设备的波束干扰的能力。 In another optional embodiment, it can be configured: L max =N<the number of transmit antennas, so, according to formula (1.3), since min{L max ,N} is N or L max (less than the number of transmit antennas) , so the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field may also be smaller than the number of transmit antennas. However, this method actually reduces the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field at the expense of reducing the beams available to the terminal device. For example, when it is necessary to compress the SRI indication field corresponding to a terminal device supporting 8 transmit antennas to less than 5 bits, this embodiment will configure N and L max to be 5. In this case, the terminal device can only provide 5 The SRS resource corresponding to the beam with better transmission performance can be selected by the network device. If the network device wants to schedule the terminal device to transmit 4-stream data, and the beam with 2 SRS resources in the 5 SRS resources exists with the signal sent by another terminal device If there is a high probability of collision, then: in order to maintain the upstream transmission capability of the terminal device, the network device can forcibly schedule 4 streams of data, which will cause at least 1 stream of data scheduled by the terminal device to collide with signals sent by other terminal devices, resulting in the terminal device being unable to avoid it. Beam interference of other terminal equipment; in order to avoid beam interference, network equipment can only schedule the remaining 3 streams of data, which will reduce the uplink transmission capability of the terminal equipment. It can be seen from this that this embodiment cannot simultaneously improve the uplink transmission capability of the terminal device and the ability to avoid beam interference of other terminal devices.
有鉴于此,本申请提供一种信息指示方法,用于在解决以支持8个发射天线为代表的更多发射天线的终端设备面临SRI指示域过大的问题时,同时提高终端设备的上行传输能力和规避其它终端设备的波束干扰的能力。In view of this, the present application provides an information indication method, which is used to improve the uplink transmission of the terminal equipment when the terminal equipment supporting more transmit antennas represented by 8 transmit antennas faces the problem that the SRI indication field is too large. capability and the ability to avoid beam interference from other terminal equipment.
下面以具体的实施例来介绍本申请中的信息指示方法。The information indicating method in this application is described below with specific embodiments.
需要说明的是,在下文的描述中,终端设备的SRS资源的数量N等于发射天线的数量,最大调度层数L max设置为4。网络设备可以是图1中的网络设备100,或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的信息指示装置,当然还可以是其他信息指示装置,例如芯片或芯片系统。终端设备可以是图1中的终端设备,或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的信息指示装置,当然还可以是其他信息指示装置,例如芯片或芯片系统。 It should be noted that, in the following description, the number N of SRS resources of the terminal device is equal to the number of transmit antennas, and the maximum number of scheduling layers L max is set to 4. The network device may be the network device 100 in FIG. 1 , or an information indicating device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, and of course other information indicating devices, such as a chip or a chip system. The terminal device may be the terminal device in FIG. 1 , or an information indicating device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device to implement the method, and of course other information indicating devices, such as a chip or a chip system.
应理解,本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。It should be understood that the terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably. "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or", which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are an "or" relationship. "At least one item(s) below" or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s). For example, at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
以及,除非有特别说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对 象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。例如,第一配置信息和第二配置信息,只是为了区分不同的信息,而并不是表示这两个信息的优先级或者重要程度等的不同。And, unless otherwise specified, ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree. For example, the first configuration information and the second configuration information are only for distinguishing different information, and do not indicate the difference in priority or importance of the two information.
实施例一Example 1
图4示例性地示出本申请实施例一提供的信息指示方法的流程示意图,该方法可以由终端设备和网络设备来执行,例如图1所示意出的终端设备和网络设备。如图4所示,该方法包括:FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application, and the method may be executed by a terminal device and a network device, such as the terminal device and the network device shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 4, the method includes:
步骤401,网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息,第一信息中包括SRI指示域,SIR指示域包括至少一个子部分。Step 401: The network device sends first information to the terminal device, where the first information includes an SRI indication field, and the SIR indication field includes at least one sub-part.
本申请实施例中,第一信息可以承载于DCI。In this embodiment of the present application, the first information may be carried in the DCI.
在一种可选地实施方式中,网络设备可以根据终端设备所属的类型来决定SRI指示域所占用的比特位数。例如,若终端设备为发射天线的数量大于或等于8的类型,则SRI指示域的比特位数小于N。这种情况下,网络设备可以先根据终端设备的N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集,再修改SRI指示域的指示方式,使SRI指示域中包括至少一个子部分,由SRI指示域的至少一个子部分来指示K个SRS资源子集中的目标SRS资源。In an optional implementation manner, the network device may determine the number of bits occupied by the SRI indication field according to the type of the terminal device. For example, if the terminal device is of a type whose number of transmit antennas is greater than or equal to 8, the number of bits in the SRI indication field is less than N. In this case, the network device can first obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources of the terminal device, and then modify the indication mode of the SRI indication field, so that the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the At least one subsection to indicate the target SRS resource in the K subsets of SRS resources.
本申请实施例中,K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中可以包括一个或多个SRS资源。K个SRS资源子集中的任意两个SRS资源子集的交集中包括的SRS资源的数量可以为0,也可以为大于0且小于N的正整数。K个SRS资源子集的并集中包括的SRS资源的数量可以为N,也可以为大于0且小于N的正整数,具体不作限定。In this embodiment of the present application, each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets may include one or more SRS resources. The number of SRS resources included in the intersection of any two SRS resource subsets in the K SRS resource subsets may be 0, or may be a positive integer greater than 0 and less than N. The number of SRS resources included in the union of the K SRS resource subsets may be N, or may be a positive integer greater than 0 and less than N, which is not specifically limited.
步骤402,终端设备根据SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从K个SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源,并使用目标SRS资源对应的波束预编码上行数据。Step 402, the terminal device determines the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI indication field, and uses the beam corresponding to the target SRS resource to precode the uplink data.
本申请实施例中,K可以为小于N的正整数。例如:In this embodiment of the present application, K may be a positive integer smaller than N. E.g:
当K为1时,若直接将N个SRS资源放在这1个SRS资源子集中,显然会使得SRI指示域的比特位数等于N,导致SRI指示域的比特位数无法满足要求。这种情况下,网络设备可以从N个SRS资源中选择出个数小于或等于希望被压缩到的最大比特位数的SRS资源,放在这1个SRS资源子集中,再由SRI指示域的至少一个子部分进行指示。如此,由于这1个SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的数量小于N,因此SRI指示域的比特位数也能小于N。或者,When K is 1, if N SRS resources are directly placed in the 1 SRS resource subset, the number of bits of the SRI indication field will obviously be equal to N, resulting in that the number of bits of the SRI indication field cannot meet the requirements. In this case, the network device can select SRS resources whose number is less than or equal to the maximum number of bits to be compressed from the N SRS resources, put them in the subset of SRS resources, and then use the SRI indication field of the SRS resources. at least one subsection is indicated. In this way, since the number of SRS resources in the one SRS resource subset is less than N, the number of bits of the SRI indication field can also be less than N. or,
当K为大于或等于2的正整数时,网络设备可以将N个SRS资源划分到至少两个SRS资源子集中,也可以将个数小于N的L个SRS资源划分到至少两个SRS资源子集,并使用SRI指示域的至少一个子部分从至少两个SRS资源子集中指示出目标SRS资源。如此,只要N个SRS资源的分组合适,就能够实现将用SRI指示域的比特位数压缩到N以下。When K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2, the network device may divide N SRS resources into at least two SRS resource subsets, or may divide L SRS resources less than N into at least two SRS resource subsets and indicates the target SRS resource from at least two subsets of SRS resources using at least one subsection of the SRI indication field. In this way, as long as the N SRS resources are appropriately grouped, the number of bits in the SRI indication field can be compressed to less than N.
关于划分SRS资源以及SRI指示域指示目标SRS资源的实现方式,具体将在实施例二和实施例三中进行说明,此处先不作介绍。The implementation manner of dividing the SRS resources and the SRI indication field indicating the target SRS resource will be specifically described in Embodiment 2 and Embodiment 3, and will not be introduced here.
步骤403,终端设备将预编码后的上行数据发送给网络设备。Step 403, the terminal device sends the precoded uplink data to the network device.
本申请实施例采用划分SRS资源和改变SRI指示域结构相结合的方式来指示上行传输所使用的预编码,只要N个SRS资源的划分方式合理(例如合理控制SRS资源子集的数量和每个SRS资源子集中SRS资源的数量),则即使终端设备支持较多发射天线导致N的取值较大,也能够实现将SRI指示域的比特位数压缩到N以下。相比于直接使用N个比 特位指示N个SRS资源的方式来说,这种分组指示的方式有助于解决当终端设备支持较多发射天线时网络设备的SRI指示域过大的技术问题,也能够相应降低携带SRI指示域的DCI的数据量,提高DCI传输的可靠性。This embodiment of the present application uses a combination of dividing SRS resources and changing the structure of the SRI indication field to indicate the precoding used for uplink transmission, as long as the division method of the N SRS resources is reasonable (for example, the number of SRS resource subsets and each The number of SRS resources in the SRS resource subset), then even if the terminal device supports more transmit antennas, resulting in a larger value of N, the number of bits in the SRI indication field can be compressed to less than N. Compared with the way of directly using N bits to indicate N SRS resources, this way of grouping indication helps to solve the technical problem that the SRI indication field of the network device is too large when the terminal device supports more transmit antennas. The data amount of the DCI carrying the SRI indication field can also be correspondingly reduced, and the reliability of the DCI transmission can be improved.
下面以实施例二和实施例三,分别介绍实施例一中方案的两种可能的实现。In the following, two possible implementations of the solution in the first embodiment are respectively introduced with the second embodiment and the third embodiment.
实施例二 Embodiment 2
图5示例性地示出本申请实施例二提供的信息指示方法的流程示意图,该方法可以由终端设备和网络设备来执行,例如图1所示意出的终端设备和网络设备。如图5所示,该方法包括:FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application, and the method may be executed by a terminal device and a network device, such as the terminal device and the network device shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 5, the method includes:
步骤501,网络设备根据终端设备的N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集。其中,K为正整数。Step 501, the network device obtains K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources of the terminal device. Among them, K is a positive integer.
在一种可选地实施方式中,网络设备可以根据N个SRS资源的传输性能来得到K个SRS资源子集。根据上述步骤304中介绍的内容可知,当N个SRS资源命名为SRS 0~SRS N-1时,这N个SRS资源所对应的N个波束beam 0~beam N-1的传输性能逐渐降低(为了便于描述,称为这N个SRS资源的传输性能逐渐降低),这种情况下,网络设备可以直接从SRS 0~SRS N-1中选取前L个SRS资源SRS 0~SRS L-1,并将这L个传输性能较好的SRS资源划分到K个SRS资源子集中。其中,L可以为小于或等于N的任意正整数。在该实施方式中,每个SRS资源子集中的SRS资源可以重复,也可以不重复,各个SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的数量可以相同,也可以不相同,具体不作限定。In an optional implementation manner, the network device may obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the transmission performance of the N SRS resources. According to the content introduced in the above step 304, when the N SRS resources are named as SRS 0 to SRS N-1, the transmission performance of the N beams beam 0 to beam N-1 corresponding to the N SRS resources gradually decreases ( For the convenience of description, it is called that the transmission performance of the N SRS resources gradually decreases). The L SRS resources with better transmission performance are divided into K SRS resource subsets. Wherein, L can be any positive integer less than or equal to N. In this embodiment, the SRS resources in each SRS resource subset may or may not be repeated, and the number of SRS resources in each SRS resource subset may be the same or different, which is not specifically limited.
在一个示例中,当K为大于或等于2的正整数时,网络设备可以设置每个SRS资源子集中包括相同数量的SRS资源。这种情况下,如果L的取值为K的整数倍,则L个SRS资源可以被平均划分到K个SRS资源子集中,每个SRS资源子集中均包括L/K个SRS资源,且K个SRS资源子集中可以不包括重复的SRS资源。如果L的取值为K的非整数倍,则L个SRS资源中对应的传输性能最好的一个或多个SRS资源可以被重复划分到至少两个SRS资源子集中。例如,当N个SRS资源包括SRS 0~SRS 7时,SRS 0的波束传输性能最好,SRS 1的波束传输性能次之,……,SRS 7的波束传输性能最差,若网络设备从SRS 0~SRS 7中选择出传输性能最好的7个SRS资源(SRS 0~SRS 6)划分至2个SRS资源子集中,则可以划分得到如表2所示的SRS资源子集:In one example, when K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2, the network device may set each SRS resource subset to include the same number of SRS resources. In this case, if the value of L is an integer multiple of K, the L SRS resources can be equally divided into K SRS resource subsets, each SRS resource subset includes L/K SRS resources, and K Duplicate SRS resources may not be included in the subset of SRS resources. If the value of L is a non-integer multiple of K, the corresponding one or more SRS resources with the best transmission performance among the L SRS resources may be repeatedly divided into at least two SRS resource subsets. For example, when the N SRS resources include SRS 0 to SRS 7, the beam transmission performance of SRS 0 is the best, the beam transmission performance of SRS 1 is second, and the beam transmission performance of SRS 7 is the worst. Seven SRS resources (SRS 0 to SRS 6) with the best transmission performance are selected from 0 to SRS 7 and divided into 2 SRS resource subsets, then the SRS resource subsets shown in Table 2 can be divided into:
SRS资源子集A subset of SRS resources SRS资源SRS Resources
SRS资源子集1SRS resource subset 1 {SRS0、SRS1、SRS3、SRS5}{SRS0, SRS1, SRS3, SRS5}
SRS资源子集2SRS resource subset 2 {SRS0、SRS2、SRS4、SRS6}{SRS0, SRS2, SRS4, SRS6}
表2Table 2
根据表2可知,在将SRS 0~SRS 6这7个SRS资源划分到SRS资源子集1和SRS资源子集2时,由于7不能被2整除,因此网络设备可以从SRS 0~SRS 6中再选择出一个传输性能最好的SRS 0,作为重复划分的SRS资源。这种情况下,划分完成后,SRS资源子集1和SRS资源子集2中都包括传输性能最好的SRS 0,且都不包括传输性能最差的SRS 7。According to Table 2, when the seven SRS resources of SRS 0 to SRS 6 are divided into SRS resource subset 1 and SRS resource subset 2, since 7 cannot be divisible by 2, the network device can select SRS 0 to SRS 6 from SRS 0 to SRS 6. Then select an SRS 0 with the best transmission performance as the repeatedly divided SRS resource. In this case, after the division is completed, SRS resource subset 1 and SRS resource subset 2 both include SRS 0 with the best transmission performance, and neither include SRS 7 with the worst transmission performance.
需要说明的是,“根据N个SRS资源的传输性能来得到K个SRS资源子集”只是一种可选地实施方式,在另一可选地实施方式中,还可以根据N个SRS资源对应的N个波 束的干扰情况来得到K个SRS资源子集,其中N个波束的干扰情况具体可以由网络设备根据与各个终端设备的历史通信情况进行先验判断得到,当N个波束中存在某个或某些波束大概率会被其它终端设备发送的信号干扰,则可以不考虑这个波束或这些波束对应的SRS资源,而只将除这个波束或这些波束以外的其它波束所对应的SRS资源划分到K个SRS资源子集中。例如在划分SRS 0~SRS 7时,若先验判断获知SRS 3和SRS 5大概率会被其它终端设备发送的信号所干扰,则网络设备可以只对SRS 0、SRS 1、SRS 2、SRS 4、SRS 6、SRS 7进行划分,当划分至2个SRS资源子集时,例如第一个资源子集可以包括{SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 6},第二个资源子集可以包括{SRS 1、SRS 4、SRS 7}。当划分至1个SRS资源子集时,例如该资源子集可以包括{SRS 0、SRS 1、SRS 2、SRS 4、SRS 6、SRS 7}。可以理解的,在其它可选地实施方式中,还可以根据N个SRS资源的传输性能和N个SRS资源对应的N个波束的干扰情况来综合得到K个SRS资源子集,例如在将SRS 0~SRS 7划分至1个SRS资源子集时,若先验判断获知SRS 3和SRS 5大概率会被其它终端设备发送的信号所干扰,且考虑到SRS 7的传输性能最差,则该资源子集可以包括{SRS 0、SRS 1、SRS 2、SRS 4、SRS 6}。It should be noted that "obtaining K SRS resource subsets according to the transmission performance of N SRS resources" is only an optional implementation. K SRS resource subsets are obtained from the interference conditions of the N beams, where the interference conditions of the N beams can be determined a priori by the network device according to the historical communication with each terminal device. If one or some beams are likely to be interfered by signals sent by other terminal equipment, the SRS resources corresponding to this beam or these beams may not be considered, and only the SRS resources corresponding to other beams except this beam or these beams are divided. into K subsets of SRS resources. For example, when dividing SRS 0 to SRS 7, if it is determined a priori that SRS 3 and SRS 5 are likely to be interfered by signals sent by other terminal equipment, the network equipment can only detect SRS 0, SRS 1, SRS 2, and SRS 4. , SRS 6, SRS 7 are divided, when divided into 2 SRS resource subsets, for example, the first resource subset may include {SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 6}, and the second resource subset may include {SRS 1. SRS 4, SRS 7}. When divided into 1 SRS resource subset, for example, the resource subset may include {SRS 0, SRS 1, SRS 2, SRS 4, SRS 6, SRS 7}. It can be understood that, in other optional embodiments, K SRS resource subsets can also be synthesized according to the transmission performance of the N SRS resources and the interference conditions of the N beams corresponding to the N SRS resources. When 0~SRS 7 are divided into 1 SRS resource subset, if it is judged a priori that SRS 3 and SRS 5 are likely to be interfered by signals sent by other terminal equipment, and considering that the transmission performance of SRS 7 is the worst, then the A subset of resources may include {SRS 0, SRS 1, SRS 2, SRS 4, SRS 6}.
本申请实施例中,将N个SRS资源划分至几个SRS资源子集中、以及每个资源子集到底包括多少SRS资源,可以根据想要将SRI指示域压缩的位数来决定。关于如何根据SRI指示域压缩的位数来确定SRS资源子集的数量和每个SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的数量,具体可以参照步骤502中的描述,此处先不作介绍。In this embodiment of the present application, the N SRS resources are divided into several SRS resource subsets, and how many SRS resources each resource subset includes may be determined according to the number of bits that want to compress the SRI indication field. For details on how to determine the number of SRS resource subsets and the number of SRS resources in each SRS resource subset according to the number of bits compressed in the SRI indication field, reference may be made to the description in step 502, which will not be introduced here.
步骤502,网络设备向终端设备发送第一配置信息,第一配置信息用于指示K个SRS资源子集中的SRS资源。Step 502: The network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the SRS resources in the K SRS resource subsets.
本申请实施例中,第一配置信息可以承载于系统信息、下行控制信息、媒体接入层信息和高层信令中的一项或多项。In this embodiment of the present application, the first configuration information may be carried in one or more of system information, downlink control information, media access layer information, and high-layer signaling.
在一种可选地实施方式中,SRI指示域可以包括第一子部分和第二子部分,第一配置信息还可以用于指示SRI指示域中第一子部分的长度(即第一比特位数)和/或第二子部分的长度(即第二比特位数)。其中,第一子部分的长度是指第一子部分所占的比特位数,第一子部分用于从K个SRS资源中指示出目标SRS资源子集,因此第一子部分对应的比特状态的数量需要大于或等于SRS资源子集的数量(即K)。例如,当SRS资源子集包括SRS资源子集1和资源子集2时,第一子部分的长度可以为1个比特,当这1个比特的比特状态为0,则指示SRS资源子集1,当这1个比特的比特状态为1,则指示SRS资源子集2。对应的,第二子部分的长度是指第二子部分所占的比特位数,第二子部分用于从目标SRS资源子集中指示出目标SRS资源,因此第二子部分对应的比特状态的数量需要大于或等于SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的可能组合的总数量。在K大于或等于2的情况下,若每个SRS资源子集中都包括相同数量的SRS资源,则第二子部分对应的比特状态的数量可以根据一个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量来确定。In an optional implementation manner, the SRI indication field may include a first subsection and a second subsection, and the first configuration information may also be used to indicate the length of the first subsection in the SRI indication field (ie, the first bit number) and/or the length of the second subsection (ie the second number of bits). The length of the first subsection refers to the number of bits occupied by the first subsection, and the first subsection is used to indicate the target SRS resource subset from the K SRS resources, so the bit state corresponding to the first subsection The number of needs to be greater than or equal to the number of SRS resource subsets (ie, K). For example, when the SRS resource subset includes SRS resource subset 1 and resource subset 2, the length of the first sub-part may be 1 bit, and when the bit status of this 1 bit is 0, it indicates SRS resource subset 1 , when the bit status of this 1 bit is 1, it indicates SRS resource subset 2. Correspondingly, the length of the second subsection refers to the number of bits occupied by the second subsection, and the second subsection is used to indicate the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset, so the corresponding bit status of the second subsection is The number needs to be greater than or equal to the total number of possible combinations of SRS resources in the subset of SRS resources. In the case where K is greater than or equal to 2, if each SRS resource subset includes the same number of SRS resources, the number of bit states corresponding to the second sub-part can be determined according to the number of SRS resources included in one SRS resource subset Sure.
在该种实施方式中,当第二子部分的指示方式不同时,第二子部分的长度也可以不同。下面示例性介绍两种确定第二子部分的长度的可能方式:In this embodiment, when the indication modes of the second subsections are different, the lengths of the second subsections may also be different. Two possible ways to determine the length of the second subsection are exemplified below:
在一种可能方式中,第二子部分按照位图方式从目标SRS资源子集中指示出目标SRS资源,这种情况下,第二子部分的长度可以与目标SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的数量相同。例如,参照表2所示,由于SRS资源子集1和SRS资源子集2中都包括4个SRS资源,因此第二子部分的长度可以配置为4比特。这4比特分别对应4个SRS资源,每个比 特的取值用于指示该比特对应的SRS资源是否为目标SRS资源。例如,当某个比特的取值为1时,指示该比特对应的SRS资源是目标SRS资源,当某个比特的取值为0时,指示该比特对应的SRS资源不是目标SRS资源。In a possible manner, the second subsection indicates the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset in a bitmap manner. In this case, the length of the second subsection may be the same as the number of SRS resources in the target SRS resource subset. same. For example, as shown in Table 2, since both the SRS resource subset 1 and the SRS resource subset 2 include 4 SRS resources, the length of the second subsection may be configured as 4 bits. These 4 bits correspond to 4 SRS resources respectively, and the value of each bit is used to indicate whether the SRS resource corresponding to the bit is the target SRS resource. For example, when the value of a certain bit is 1, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the bit is the target SRS resource, and when the value of a certain bit is 0, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the bit is not the target SRS resource.
在另一种可能方式中,第二子部分按照比特状态组合方式从目标SRS资源子集中指示出目标SRS资源,这种情况下,可以按照如下公式(2.1)计算得到第二子部分的长度:In another possible manner, the second subsection indicates the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset according to the combination of bit states. In this case, the length of the second subsection can be calculated according to the following formula (2.1):
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000005
其中,n为第二子部分的长度,l为目标SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的数量。Wherein, n is the length of the second subsection, and l is the number of SRS resources in the target SRS resource subset.
可以理解的,当K个SRS资源子集中SRS资源的数量不同,则公式(2.1)中的l也可以是指K个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的最大数量,如此,当目标SRS资源子集为K个SRS资源子集中的任一SRS资源子集时,第二子部分的长度都能够用于指示出目标SRS资源子集中的目标SRS资源,第二子部分的长度足够。It can be understood that when the number of SRS resources in the K SRS resource subsets is different, 1 in the formula (2.1) may also refer to the maximum number of SRS resources included in the K SRS resource subsets. In this way, when the target SRS resource subset is When the set is any SRS resource subset in the K SRS resource subsets, the length of the second subpart can be used to indicate the target SRS resource in the target SRS resource subset, and the length of the second subpart is sufficient.
下面以表2所示意的SRS资源子集为例,介绍第二子部分按照比特状态组合方式指示出目标SRS资源子集中的目标SRS资源的实现。在该示例中,由于SRS资源子集1和SRS资源子集2中都包括4个SRS资源,而4个SRS资源共存在如下15种可能的组合,因此第二子部分的长度所对应的比特状态的数量不少于15种,按照公式(2.1)计算得到的第二子部分的长度为4比特。在一个示例中,这4比特的比特状态可以分别用于指示:The following takes the SRS resource subset shown in Table 2 as an example to introduce the implementation of the second sub-part indicating the target SRS resource in the target SRS resource subset according to the combination of bit states. In this example, since both SRS resource subset 1 and SRS resource subset 2 include 4 SRS resources, and the 4 SRS resources have the following 15 possible combinations, the bits corresponding to the length of the second subpart The number of states is not less than 15, and the length of the second sub-part calculated according to formula (2.1) is 4 bits. In one example, the bit states of these 4 bits may be used to indicate:
0001~0100,指示目标SRS资源子集中存在1个目标SRS资源,共有4种可能,例如当目标SRS资源子集为SRS资源子集1,则这1个目标SRS资源可以为SRS0、SRS1、SRS3或SRS5;0001 to 0100, indicating that there is 1 target SRS resource in the target SRS resource subset, and there are 4 possibilities. For example, when the target SRS resource subset is SRS resource subset 1, the target SRS resource can be SRS0, SRS1, SRS3 or SRS5;
0101~1010,指示目标SRS资源子集中存在2个目标SRS资源,共有6种可能,例如当目标SRS资源子集为SRS资源子集1,则这2个目标SRS资源可以为SRS 0和SRS 1,SRS 0和SRS 3,SRS 0和SRS 5,SRS 1和SRS 3,SRS 1和SRS 5,或者SRS 3和SRS 5;0101 to 1010, indicating that there are 2 target SRS resources in the target SRS resource subset, and there are 6 possibilities. For example, when the target SRS resource subset is SRS resource subset 1, the two target SRS resources can be SRS 0 and SRS 1 , SRS 0 and SRS 3, SRS 0 and SRS 5, SRS 1 and SRS 3, SRS 1 and SRS 5, or SRS 3 and SRS 5;
1011~1110,指示目标SRS资源子集中存在3个目标SRS资源,共有4种可能,例如当目标SRS资源子集为SRS资源子集1,则这3个目标SRS资源可以为SRS 0、SRS 1和SRS 3,SRS 0、SRS 1和SRS5,SRS 0、SRS 3和SRS 5,SRS 1、SRS 3和SRS 5;1011 to 1110, indicating that there are 3 target SRS resources in the target SRS resource subset, and there are 4 possibilities. For example, when the target SRS resource subset is SRS resource subset 1, the 3 target SRS resources can be SRS 0, SRS 1 and SRS 3, SRS 0, SRS 1 and SRS5, SRS 0, SRS 3 and SRS 5, SRS 1, SRS 3 and SRS 5;
1111,指示目标SRS资源子集中存在4个目标SRS资源,共有1种可能,例如当目标SRS资源子集为SRS资源子集1,则这4个目标SRS资源可以为SRS 0、SRS 1、SRS 3和SRS 5。1111, indicating that there are 4 target SRS resources in the target SRS resource subset, and there is one possibility. For example, when the target SRS resource subset is SRS resource subset 1, the 4 target SRS resources can be SRS 0, SRS 1, SRS 3 and SRS 5.
按照上述示例,4比特共存在16种比特状态,而实际使用到的只有15种,这种情况下,剩余的1个比特状态还可以用于网络设备指示其它信息。且,需要说明的是,上述比特状态与SRS资源的对应关系只是一种示例性的说明。在具体实施中,哪个比特状态与哪些SRS资源对应,具体可以由网络设备自行设置,且网络设备还可以将设置好的对应关系以字典的形式发送给终端设备,以便于后续终端设备根据SRI指示域从该字典中查询出对应的SRS资源。According to the above example, there are 16 bit states in 4 bits, but only 15 are actually used. In this case, the remaining 1 bit state can also be used for the network device to indicate other information. Moreover, it should be noted that the above-mentioned corresponding relationship between the bit state and the SRS resource is only an exemplary description. In the specific implementation, which bit state corresponds to which SRS resources can be specifically set by the network device, and the network device can also send the set correspondence to the terminal device in the form of a dictionary, so that the subsequent terminal device can follow the SRI instructions. The domain queries the corresponding SRS resource from the dictionary.
在上述实施方式的一种特例中,当K为1时,SRS资源子集只有1个,这种情况下,SRI指示域中第一子部分的长度可以为0,SRI指示域中第二子部分的长度可以根据这1个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量来确定,确定的方式参照上述内容,不再赘述。In a special case of the above embodiment, when K is 1, there is only one SRS resource subset. In this case, the length of the first subsection in the SRI indication field may be 0, and the length of the second subsection in the SRI indication field may be 0. The length of the part may be determined according to the number of SRS resources included in the one SRS resource subset, and the determination method may refer to the above-mentioned content, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中,“由第一配置信息指示第一子部分的长度和/或第二子部分的长度”只是一种可选地实施方式。在另一种可选地实施方式中,第一子部分的长度和/或第二子部 分的长度也可以由终端设备自行计算得到,或者,由网络设备和终端设备预定义。当终端设备自行计算得到第一子部分的长度和第二子部分的长度时,这种情况下,第一配置信息还可以指示出K的取值(和/或第二子部分的指示方式),以便于终端设备根据K的取值按照上述方式计算得到第一子部分的长度,根据每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量计算得到第二子部分的长度。In this embodiment of the present application, "the length of the first subsection and/or the length of the second subsection is indicated by the first configuration information" is only an optional implementation. In another optional implementation manner, the length of the first subsection and/or the length of the second subsection may also be calculated by the terminal device itself, or pre-defined by the network device and the terminal device. When the terminal device calculates the length of the first subsection and the length of the second subsection by itself, in this case, the first configuration information can also indicate the value of K (and/or the indication method of the second subsection) , so that the terminal device can obtain the length of the first subsection by calculating according to the value of K in the above manner, and calculate the length of the second subsection according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset.
根据上述内容,本申请实施例中,第一子部分的长度和第二子部分的长度可以通过如下方式得到:According to the above content, in this embodiment of the present application, the length of the first subsection and the length of the second subsection may be obtained in the following manner:
第一配置信息中配置第一子部分的长度和第二子部分的长度;或者,The length of the first subsection and the length of the second subsection are configured in the first configuration information; or,
第一配置信息中配置第一子部分的长度,终端设备根据每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量自行计算得到第二子部分的长度;或者,The length of the first subsection is configured in the first configuration information, and the terminal device calculates the length of the second subsection by itself according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset; or,
第一配置信息中配置第二子部分的长度和K的取值,终端设备根据K的取值自行计算得到第一子部分的长度;或者,The length of the second subsection and the value of K are configured in the first configuration information, and the terminal device calculates the length of the first subsection by itself according to the value of K; or,
第一配置信息中配置K的取值,终端设备根据K的取值自行计算得到第一子部分的长度,根据每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量自行计算得到第二子部分的长度;或者,The value of K is configured in the first configuration information, the terminal device calculates the length of the first subsection by itself according to the value of K, and calculates the length of the second subsection according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset. ;or,
预定义第一子部分的长度和第二子部分的长度;或者,Predefine the length of the first subsection and the length of the second subsection; or,
预定义第一子部分的长度,第一配置信息配置第二子部分的长度;或者,The length of the first subsection is predefined, and the first configuration information configures the length of the second subsection; or,
预定义第一子部分的长度,终端设备根据每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量自行计算得到第二子部分的长度;或者,The length of the first subsection is predefined, and the terminal device calculates the length of the second subsection by itself according to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset; or,
预定义第二子部分的长度,第一配置信息配置第一子部分的长度;或者,The length of the second subsection is predefined, and the first configuration information configures the length of the first subsection; or,
预定义第二子部分的长度,第一配置信息配置K的取值,终端设备根据K的取值自行计算得到第一子部分的长度。The length of the second subsection is predefined, the value of K is configured in the first configuration information, and the terminal device calculates the length of the first subsection by itself according to the value of K.
需要说明的是,上述内容中示意出的“第一配置信息配置K的取值”只是一种可选地实施方式,在其它可选地实施方式中,K的取值也可以由网络设备和终端设备预定义。It should be noted that the "value of the first configuration information configuration K" shown in the above content is only an optional implementation manner, and in other optional implementation manners, the value of K can also be determined by the network device and the End devices are predefined.
本申请实施例中,当每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量相同时,若要将SRI指示域压缩到q个比特位内,则由于SRS资源子集的数量K决定了第一子部分的长度,每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量l决定了第二子部分的长度,而第一子部分的长度和第二子部分的长度之和决定了SRI指示域的长度,因此,当第一子部分和第二子部分均按照比特状态组合方式进行指示时,K和l需要满足如下公式(2.2):In the embodiment of the present application, when the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset is the same, if the SRI indication field is to be compressed into q bits, the number K of the SRS resource subsets determines the first subset The length of the part, the number 1 of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset determines the length of the second subpart, and the sum of the length of the first subpart and the length of the second subpart determines the length of the SRI indication field, Therefore, when both the first subsection and the second subsection are indicated according to the combination of bit states, K and l need to satisfy the following formula (2.2):
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000006
按照公式(2.2),在已知N、L max和q的情况下,能够解出K和l的多种组合。示例来说,当终端设备存在8个发射天线时,可以配置N为8,考虑到现阶段终端设备的硬件处理能力只能支持4流或4流以下的数据传输,因此可以配置L max为4,由于按照上述方案网络设备每次都是从1个SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源,因此若想要网络设备能够一次传输4流数据(即确定出4个目标SRS资源),则需要每个SRS资源子集中的SRS资源数量l大于或等于4。这种情况下,假设要将SRI指示域压缩到5个比特位内(q=5),则K和l的组合可以为: According to formula (2.2), given N, Lmax , and q, various combinations of K and l can be solved. For example, when the terminal device has 8 transmit antennas, N can be configured to be 8. Considering that the hardware processing capability of the terminal device can only support data transmission of 4 streams or less at this stage, L max can be configured to be 4. , since the network device determines the target SRS resource from a subset of SRS resources each time according to the above scheme, if the network device is to be able to transmit 4 streams of data at a time (that is, to determine 4 target SRS resources), it is necessary to The number 1 of SRS resources in the subset of SRS resources is greater than or equal to 4. In this case, assuming that the SRI indication field is to be compressed into 5 bits (q=5), the combination of K and l can be:
K为1,l为小于或等于5的正整数,例如l为4或l为5。这种情况下,第一子部分的长度为0,第二子部分的长度为4或5。当配置l为5时,网络设备可以从8个SRS资 源中选择出5个波束碰撞概率较小且传输性能较好的SRS资源组成1个SRS资源子集,后续网络设备也只会从该资源子集中选择目标SRS资源以确定终端设备上行传输所使用的预编码。K is 1, and l is a positive integer less than or equal to 5, for example, l is 4 or l is 5. In this case, the length of the first subsection is 0 and the length of the second subsection is 4 or 5. When the configuration 1 is 5, the network device can select 5 SRS resources with low beam collision probability and better transmission performance from the 8 SRS resources to form one SRS resource subset, and subsequent network devices will only use this resource The target SRS resource is selected in the subset to determine the precoding used by the terminal equipment for uplink transmission.
K为2,l为小于或等于4的正整数,例如l为4。这种情况下,第一子部分的长度为1,第二子部分的长度为4。网络设备可以从8个SRS资源中选择出传输性能较好的6个或7个SRS资源组成2个SRS资源子集,每个SRS资源子集中包括4个SRS资源,且这2个SRS资源子集中可以存在重复的SRS资源。K is 2, and l is a positive integer less than or equal to 4, for example, l is 4. In this case, the length of the first subsection is 1 and the length of the second subsection is 4. The network device can select 6 or 7 SRS resources with better transmission performance from the 8 SRS resources to form 2 SRS resource subsets, each SRS resource subset includes 4 SRS resources, and these 2 SRS resource subsets Duplicate SRS resources may exist in a set.
针对于K和l的其它的组合,例如K为3或4、l为小于或等于3的正整数,以及K为5或7,l为小于或等于2的正整数,由于这些组合会使得每个SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的数量小于4,因此网络设备每次最多只能选择出3个或3个以下的目标SRS资源,导致终端设备后续只能传输3流或3流以下的数据,如此,终端设备的传输能力受到限制,不利于提升终端设备和网络设备的通信性能,因此,这些组合不适用于划分SRS资源子集。For other combinations of K and l, for example, K is 3 or 4, l is a positive integer less than or equal to 3, and K is 5 or 7, and l is a positive integer less than or equal to 2, since these combinations will make each The number of SRS resources in a subset of SRS resources is less than 4, so the network device can only select 3 or less target SRS resources at most each time, so that the terminal device can only transmit data of 3 streams or less in the future. In this way, the transmission capability of the terminal device is limited, which is not conducive to improving the communication performance of the terminal device and the network device. Therefore, these combinations are not suitable for dividing SRS resource subsets.
本申请实施例中,在SRS资源子集的数量K等于1的情况下,该SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量有限(例如只有5个),虽然这会使得网络设备可选择的SRS资源变少,但是该SRS资源子集中的SRS资源是预先根据波束碰撞情况和传输性能选定的,因此既有利于后续终端设备传输的上行数据尽可能不被其它终端设备的信号干扰,又能够保证终端设备的传输效率。在SRS资源子集的数量K大于或等于2的情况下,当SRI被压缩到的比特位数一致时,SRS资源子集的数量K越多,则每个SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的数量l越少,网络设备可以选择的SRS资源也就越少。这种情况下,当存在某些SRS资源被其它终端设备发送的信号干扰的概率较大时,网络设备只能从较少的SRS资源中选择目标SRS资源,导致终端设备的上行传输性能达不到要求。基于此,网络设备每次都可以从K和l的可能组合中选择K较小、l较大的组合,如此,K个SRS资源子集中SRS资源的并集能够尽可能多,提供给网络设备选择的SRS资源也就越多,目标SRS资源的可选性变强。由此可知,不论是SRS资源子集的数量K配置为等于1还是大于1,本申请中的方案都有助于网络设备同步实现调度传输性能较好的SRS资源和规避波束干扰的综合性能。In this embodiment of the present application, when the number K of SRS resource subsets is equal to 1, the number of SRS resources included in the SRS resource subset is limited (for example, there are only 5), although this will make the network device selectable SRS resources However, the SRS resources in the SRS resource subset are selected in advance according to the beam collision situation and transmission performance, so it is not only beneficial for the uplink data transmitted by the subsequent terminal equipment to not be interfered by the signals of other terminal equipment as much as possible, but also to ensure Transmission efficiency of terminal equipment. In the case where the number K of SRS resource subsets is greater than or equal to 2, when the number of bits to which the SRI is compressed is the same, the greater the number K of SRS resource subsets, the greater the number of SRS resources in each SRS resource subset. The smaller the number l, the fewer SRS resources the network device can select. In this case, when there is a high probability that some SRS resources are interfered by signals sent by other terminal equipment, the network equipment can only select the target SRS resource from fewer SRS resources, resulting in the terminal equipment's uplink transmission performance not reaching the desired level. to the request. Based on this, the network device can select a combination with a smaller K and a larger l from the possible combinations of K and l each time. In this way, the union of the SRS resources in the K SRS resource subsets can be provided to the network device as much as possible. The more SRS resources are selected, the more optional the target SRS resources are. It can be seen from this that, whether the number K of SRS resource subsets is configured to be equal to 1 or greater than 1, the solution in this application can help network devices to achieve the comprehensive performance of scheduling SRS resources with better transmission performance and avoiding beam interference synchronously.
步骤503,网络设备向终端设备发送DL-RS。 Step 503, the network device sends the DL-RS to the terminal device.
步骤504,终端设备对接收到的DL-RS进行下行信道测量,获取下行信道的CSI,并根据下行信道的CSI,计算出N个上行传输所使用的波束。Step 504, the terminal device performs downlink channel measurement on the received DL-RS, obtains the CSI of the downlink channel, and calculates N beams used for uplink transmission according to the CSI of the downlink channel.
步骤505,终端设备使用N个波束预编码SRS,并将预编码后的SRS发送给网络设备。Step 505, the terminal device precodes the SRS using N beams, and sends the precoded SRS to the network device.
步骤506,网络设备根据预编码后的SRS进行信道估计,并计算出终端设备使用每个SRS资源时的上行传输速率,根据信道估计结果和N个SRS资源分别对应的上行传输速率,确定出一个或多个目标SRS资源。Step 506, the network equipment performs channel estimation according to the precoded SRS, and calculates the uplink transmission rate when the terminal equipment uses each SRS resource, and determines an uplink transmission rate corresponding to the channel estimation result and the N SRS resources respectively. or multiple target SRS resources.
步骤503至步骤506的具体实现过程,可以参照图3,此处不再赘述。For the specific implementation process of step 503 to step 506, reference may be made to FIG. 3, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中,网络设备在确定一个或多个目标SRS资源时,可以根据N个SRS资源对应的N个波束的实际传输性能和实际碰撞情况来确定,以尽量避开存在波束碰撞的波束对应的SRS资源,并尽量调用传输性能较强的波束对应的SRS资源。例如当N个SRS资源为SRS 0~SRS 7时,若SRS 1对应的波束beam1和SRS 3对应的波束beam3大概率存在波束碰撞情况,则网络设备可以从剩余的SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 4、SRS 5、SRS 6、SRS 7中选择传输性能较强的4个SRS资源(假设终端设备支持4流传输)作为目标SRS资源, 即SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 4和SRS 5。In this embodiment of the present application, when determining one or more target SRS resources, the network device may determine it according to the actual transmission performance and actual collision situation of N beams corresponding to the N SRS resources, so as to avoid beams with beam collisions as much as possible The corresponding SRS resources, and try to call the SRS resources corresponding to the beams with stronger transmission performance. For example, when the N SRS resources are SRS 0 to SRS 7, if there is a high probability of beam collision between the beam beam 1 corresponding to SRS 1 and the beam beam 3 corresponding to SRS 3, the network device can start from the remaining SRS 0, SRS 2, and SRS 4. , SRS 5, SRS 6, and SRS 7, select 4 SRS resources with stronger transmission performance (assuming that the terminal device supports 4-stream transmission) as the target SRS resources, namely SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 5.
步骤507,网络设备判断一个或多个目标SRS资源是否位于同一SRS资源子集中,若不是,则执行步骤508,若是,则执行步骤509。Step 507, the network device determines whether one or more target SRS resources are located in the same SRS resource subset, if not, then executes step 508, and if so, executes step 509.
本申请实施例中,由于SRI指示域的第二子部分只能从一个SRS资源子集中指示出目标SRS资源,因此当步骤506中确定出的各目标SRS资源位于不同的SRS资源子集时,网络设备实际上无法使用SRI指示域的第二子部分进行目标SRS资源的指示。因此若要按照上述实施例中的SRI指示域进行指示,则必须要保证各目标SRS资源位于同一SRS资源子集中。基于此,网络设备在确定出一个或多个目标SRS资源后,还需要判断一个或多个目标SRS资源是否位于同一SRS资源子集。在上述示例中,由于网络设备选择的SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 4和SRS 5这4个目标SRS资源中的SRS 0、SRS 2和SRS 4位于SRS资源子集2中,而SRS 5位于SRS资源子集1中,因此这4个目标SRS资源不位于同一SRS资源子集中。In the embodiment of the present application, since the second sub-part of the SRI indication field can only indicate the target SRS resource from one SRS resource subset, when each target SRS resource determined in step 506 is located in a different SRS resource subset, The network device cannot actually use the second sub-part of the SRI indication field to indicate the target SRS resource. Therefore, to indicate according to the SRI indication field in the above embodiment, it must be ensured that each target SRS resource is located in the same SRS resource subset. Based on this, after determining one or more target SRS resources, the network device also needs to determine whether the one or more target SRS resources are located in the same SRS resource subset. In the above example, since SRS 0, SRS 2 and SRS 4 of the 4 target SRS resources, SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 5 selected by the network device are located in SRS resource subset 2, and SRS 5 is located in SRS In resource subset 1, the 4 target SRS resources are not located in the same SRS resource subset.
步骤508,网络设备从K个SRS资源子集中重新选择一个或多个目标SRS资源。Step 508, the network device reselects one or more target SRS resources from the K SRS resource subsets.
在一种可选地实施方式中,当一个或多个目标SRS资源不位于同一SRS资源子集时,网络设备可以从K个SRS资源子集中选择出包含目标SRS资源最多的一个SRS资源子集作为目标SRS资源子集,并从这个目标SRS资源子集中重新确定出一个或多个目标SRS资源。例如,在上述示例中,由于SRS资源子集2中包括SRS 0、SRS 2和SRS 4这3个目标SRS资源,而SRS资源子集1中只包括SRS 5这1个目标SRS资源,因此可以将SRS资源子集2作为目标SRS资源子集,并可以从目标SRS资源子集2的非目标SRS资源中选择传输性能较好的SRS资源补充到目标SRS资源中,如此,重新确定后的4个目标SRS资源可以包括SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 4和SRS 6。In an optional embodiment, when one or more target SRS resources are not located in the same SRS resource subset, the network device may select an SRS resource subset containing the most target SRS resources from the K SRS resource subsets As the target SRS resource subset, one or more target SRS resources are re-determined from the target SRS resource subset. For example, in the above example, since SRS resource subset 2 includes three target SRS resources, SRS 0, SRS 2, and SRS 4, and SRS resource subset 1 includes only one target SRS resource, SRS 5, it is possible to The SRS resource subset 2 is used as the target SRS resource subset, and SRS resources with better transmission performance can be selected from the non-target SRS resources of the target SRS resource subset 2 to supplement the target SRS resources. In this way, the re-determined 4 The target SRS resources may include SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4, and SRS 6.
步骤509,网络设备根据一个或多个目标SRS资源所在的目标SRS资源子集,确定SRI指示域中第一子部分的取值,根据一个或多个目标SRS资源在该目标SRS资源子集中的组合情况,确定SRI指示域中第二子部分的取值。Step 509, the network device determines the value of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field according to the target SRS resource subset where the one or more target SRS resources are located, and according to the one or more target SRS resources in the target SRS resource subset. Combining the conditions, determine the value of the second sub-part in the SRI indication field.
在上述示例中,4个目标SRS资源SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 4和SRS 6所在的SRS资源子集为SRS资源子集2,因此SRI指示域中第一子部分的取值可以为1。SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 4和SRS 6这种组合属于SRS资源子集2中SRS资源组合情况的第15种情况(从SRS资源子集2中选取1个SRS资源包括4种情况,从SRS资源子集2中选取2个SRS资源包括6种情况,从SRS资源子集2中选取3个SRS资源包括4种情况,从SRS资源子集2中选取4个SRS资源包括1种情况,因此选取4个SRS资源的这种情况属于第15种情况),因此按照步骤502中的介绍可知SRI指示域中第一子部分的取值可以为1111。由此可知,SRI指示域为11111。In the above example, the SRS resource subset where the 4 target SRS resources SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 6 are located is the SRS resource subset 2, so the value of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field may be 1. The combination of SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 6 belongs to the 15th case of SRS resource combination in SRS resource subset 2 (selecting 1 SRS resource from SRS resource subset 2 includes 4 cases, from SRS The selection of 2 SRS resources from resource subset 2 includes 6 cases, the selection of 3 SRS resources from SRS resource subset 2 includes 4 cases, and the selection of 4 SRS resources from SRS resource subset 2 includes 1 case, so The case of selecting 4 SRS resources belongs to the 15th case), so according to the introduction in step 502, it can be known that the value of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field can be 1111. It can be seen that the SRI indication field is 11111.
步骤510,网络设备向终端设备发送DCI,DCI中携带有SRI指示域。Step 510, the network device sends DCI to the terminal device, and the DCI carries the SRI indication field.
步骤511,终端设备根据SRI指示域的第一子部分的取值,从K个SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源子集,根据SRI指示域的第二子部分的取值,从目标SRS资源子集中确定出一个或多个目标SRS资源,使用一个或多个目标SRS资源对应的波束预编码上行数据。Step 511, the terminal device determines the target SRS resource subset from the K SRS resource subsets according to the value of the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, and determines the target SRS resource subset from the value of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field. One or more target SRS resources are determined in the subset, and uplink data is precoded using beams corresponding to the one or more target SRS resources.
本申请实施例中,当终端设备解析DCI确定SRI指示域为11111时,终端设备可以先根据第一子部分的长度从SRI指示域中确定出第一子部分的取值,即1,进而确定出第一子部分取值为1的比特状态对应为SRS资源子集2。进一步地,终端设备可以再根据第二 子部分的长度从SRI指示域中确定出第二子部分的取值,即1111,进而从SRS资源子集2中确定出第二子部分取值为1111的比特状态对应为SRS0、SRS2、SRS4和SRS6。In this embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device parses the DCI and determines that the SRI indication field is 11111, the terminal device may first determine the value of the first subsection from the SRI indication field according to the length of the first subsection, that is, 1, and then determine The bit state in which the value of the first sub-part is 1 corresponds to SRS resource subset 2. Further, the terminal device can determine the value of the second subsection from the SRI indication field according to the length of the second subsection, that is, 1111, and then determine the value of the second subsection from the SRS resource subset 2 to be 1111. The bit states of are corresponding to SRS0, SRS2, SRS4 and SRS6.
步骤512,终端设备将预编码后的上行数据发送给网络设备。Step 512, the terminal device sends the precoded uplink data to the network device.
本申请实施例中,在上行传输时,终端设备可以将上行数据划分为4流,然后分别使用SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 4和SRS 6分别对应的波束beam0、beam2、beam4和beam6加权这4流数据,并将加权后的这4流数据分别发送给网络设备。In the embodiment of the present application, during uplink transmission, the terminal device may divide the uplink data into 4 streams, and then use the beams beam0, beam2, beam4, and beam6 corresponding to SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4, and SRS 6 to weight these 4 streams respectively. Stream data, and send the weighted 4 streams of data to the network device respectively.
需要说明的是,步骤506至步骤512是以从至少两个SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源为例介绍确定SRI指示域的指示过程。在一个特例中,若只存在一个SRS资源子集,则网络设备可以直接根据一个或多个目标SRS资源在这一个SRS资源子集中的组合情况确定SRI指示域,终端设备也可以直接根据SRI指示域从这一个SRS资源子集中确定出一个或多个目标SRS资源。例如,当按照波束碰撞概率和传输性能将SRS 0~SRS 7这8个SRS资源划分到一个SRS资源子集{SRS 0、SRS 1、SRS 2、SRS 4和SRS 6}时,若网络设备想调度SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 4和SRS 6,则网络设备可以配置SRI指示域为11101。这种情况下,终端设备根据第一子部分的长度0获知只存在1个SRS资源子集,因此终端设备可以直接根据第二子部分的取值11101,确定出一个或多个目标SRS资源的组合属于第29种组合情况(SRS资源子集中包括5个SRS资源,从SRS资源子集中选取1个SRS资源包括5种情况,对应为00001~00101;从SRS资源子集中选取2个SRS资源包括10种情况,对应为00110~01111;从SRS资源子集中选取3个SRS资源包括10种情况,对应为10000~11001;从SRS资源子集中选取4个SRS资源包括5种情况,对应为11010~11110;从SRS资源子集中选取5个SRS资源包括1种情况,对应为11111),因此对应的目标SRS资源的组合为SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 4和SRS 6。It should be noted that, steps 506 to 512 take determining the target SRS resource from at least two SRS resource subsets as an example to introduce the indication process of determining the SRI indication field. In a special case, if there is only one SRS resource subset, the network device can directly determine the SRI indication field according to the combination of one or more target SRS resources in the one SRS resource subset, and the terminal device can also directly according to the SRI indication The domain determines one or more target SRS resources from this subset of SRS resources. For example, when the 8 SRS resources of SRS 0 to SRS 7 are divided into a subset of SRS resources {SRS 0, SRS 1, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 6} according to the beam collision probability and transmission performance, if the network device wants to Scheduling SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 6, the network device can configure the SRI indication field as 11101. In this case, the terminal device knows that there is only one SRS resource subset according to the length 0 of the first subpart, so the terminal device can directly determine the value of one or more target SRS resources according to the value of the second subpart 11101 The combination belongs to the 29th combination case (5 SRS resources are included in the SRS resource subset, and 1 SRS resource is selected from the SRS resource subset, including 5 cases, corresponding to 00001 to 00101; 2 SRS resources are selected from the SRS resource subset, including 10 cases, corresponding to 00110~01111; 3 SRS resources selected from the SRS resource subset include 10 cases, corresponding to 10000~11001; 4 SRS resources selected from the SRS resource subset, including 5 cases, corresponding to 11010~ 11110: Selecting 5 SRS resources from the SRS resource subset includes 1 case, corresponding to 11111), so the combination of the corresponding target SRS resources is SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 4 and SRS 6.
在实施例二中,网络设备根据N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集,并使用SRI指示域的第一子部分指示目标SRS资源所在的目标SRS资源子集,使用SRI指示域的第二子部分指示目标SRS资源子集中的目标SRS资源。虽然这种方式使得网络设备只能从1个SRS资源子集中选择目标SRS资源,降低了网络设备选择SRS资源的灵活性,但是这种指示方式在合理配置K个SRS资源子集的情况下能使SRI指示域的比特位数之和小于N,相比于直接使用N个比特位指示N个SRS资源的方式来说,有助于降低SRI指示域的比特位数,相应降低携带SRI指示域的DCI的数据量,提高DCI传输的可靠性。更进一步地,不论是在划分SRS资源子集时考虑传输性能和波束干扰情况,还是通过划分更少SRS资源子集的方式向网络设备提供更多可选的SRS资源,都能提高网络设备调度传输性能高的SRS资源和规避波束干扰的综合性能,有助于终端设备以较好的上行传输能力传输不被其它终端设备的波束干扰的上行数据。In the second embodiment, the network device obtains K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources, and uses the first sub-part of the SRI indication field to indicate the target SRS resource subset where the target SRS resource is located, and uses the second sub-part of the SRI indication field to indicate the target SRS resource subset. The subsections indicate target SRS resources in a subset of target SRS resources. Although this method enables the network device to select the target SRS resource from only one SRS resource subset, which reduces the flexibility of the network device to select the SRS resource, this indication method can effectively configure K SRS resource subsets. Making the sum of the number of bits in the SRI indication field less than N, compared with the way of directly using N bits to indicate N SRS resources, helps to reduce the number of bits in the SRI indication field, and correspondingly reduces the number of bits in the SRI indication field. The data volume of DCI improves the reliability of DCI transmission. Further, whether it is considering transmission performance and beam interference when dividing SRS resource subsets, or providing more optional SRS resources to network equipment by dividing fewer SRS resource subsets, it can improve network equipment scheduling. The comprehensive performance of SRS resources with high transmission performance and beam interference avoidance helps terminal equipment to transmit uplink data that is not interfered by beams of other terminal equipment with better uplink transmission capability.
【实施例三】[Example 3]
图6示例性地示出本申请实施例三提供的信息指示方法的流程示意图,该方法可以由网络设备和终端设备来执行,例如图1所示意出的网络设备和终端设备。如图6所示,该方法包括:FIG. 6 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application. The method may be executed by a network device and a terminal device, such as the network device and the terminal device shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 6, the method includes:
步骤601,网络设备将N个SRS资源划分到第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集中,其中第一SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的M个SRS资源,第二个SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中除M个SRS资源以外的N-M个SRS资源。其中,M为小于 N的正整数。Step 601, the network device divides the N SRS resources into a first SRS resource subset and a second SRS resource subset, wherein the first SRS resource subset includes M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, and the second SRS resource The subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources among the N SRS resources. Among them, M is a positive integer less than N.
在一种可选地实施方式中,第一SRS资源子集中包括的M个SRS资源可以是N个SRS资源按照传输性能由强到弱排列得到的前M个SRS资源(即SRS 0~SRS M-1),第二SRS资源子集中包括的N-M个SRS资源可以是N个SRS资源按照传输性能由强到弱排列得到的后N-M个SRS资源(即SRS M~SRS N)。这种情况下,第一SRS资源子集中包括的M个SRS资源的传输性能较强,第二SRS资源子集中包括的N-M个SRS资源的传输性能相对较弱。In an optional implementation manner, the M SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset may be the first M SRS resources (that is, SRS 0˜SRS M ) obtained by arranging the N SRS resources in descending order of transmission performance. -1), the NM SRS resources included in the second SRS resource subset may be the last NM SRS resources (ie, SRS M~SRS N) obtained by arranging the N SRS resources from strong to weak according to the transmission performance. In this case, the transmission performance of the M SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset is relatively strong, and the transmission performance of the N-M SRS resources included in the second SRS resource subset is relatively weak.
按照该种实施方式,虽然第一SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的传输性能最好,但为了兼容意外情况发生(例如第一SRS资源子集中的SRS资源存在碰撞),因此网络设备并不能只设置包含最强的L max个SRS资源的第一SRS资源子集,而是还需要设置第二个SRS资源子集。这种情况下,为了使SRI指示域的比特位数小于L max,则需要配置第一个资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量M小于L max。且,由于网络设备希望能够从第一SRS资源子集中调度到较多的SRS资源,从第二SRS资源子集中调度到部分较少的SRS资源,因此第一SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量M可以设置为略小于L max的值。例如,当考虑到现阶段的终端设备最大只能支持4流传输而设置L max为4时,若N个SRS资源为SRS 0~SRS 7(SRS 0~SRS 7的传输性能依次变差),则网络设备可以将传输性能最强的前3个资源子集SRS 0、SRS 1和SRS 2划分到第一SRS资源子集中,将剩余的5个资源子集SRS 3~SRS 7划分到第二SRS资源子集中。这种情况下,M的取值配置为3。 According to this embodiment, although the transmission performance of the SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset is the best, in order to be compatible with unexpected situations (for example, the SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset collide), the network device cannot only set The first SRS resource subset contains the strongest L max SRS resources, but also the second SRS resource subset needs to be set. In this case, in order to make the number of bits of the SRI indication field smaller than L max , it is necessary to configure the number M of SRS resources included in the first resource subset to be smaller than L max . Moreover, since the network device hopes to be able to schedule more SRS resources from the first SRS resource subset, and schedule some less SRS resources from the second SRS resource subset, the SRS resources included in the first SRS resource subset are The number M can be set to a value slightly smaller than Lmax . For example, when considering that the terminal equipment at the current stage can only support 4-stream transmission at most and set L max to 4, if the N SRS resources are SRS 0 to SRS 7 (the transmission performance of SRS 0 to SRS 7 deteriorates in sequence), Then the network device can divide the first 3 resource subsets SRS 0, SRS 1 and SRS 2 with the strongest transmission performance into the first SRS resource subset, and divide the remaining 5 resource subsets SRS 3 to SRS 7 into the second SRS resource subset. A subset of SRS resources. In this case, the value of M is configured as 3.
步骤602,网络设备向终端设备发送第二配置信息,第二配置信息用于指示SRI指示域的第一子部分的长度和第二子部分的长度。Step 602: The network device sends second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate the length of the first sub-part and the length of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
在一种可选地实施方式中,SRI指示域的第一子部分可以按照位图的方式指示第一SRS资源子集中的第一目标SRS资源,这种情况下,SRI指示域的第一子部分的长度与第一SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的数量M相同,SRI指示域的第一子部分中的每个比特位可以对应第一SRS资源子集中的一个SRS资源,当该比特位的取值为1时,指示该比特位对应的SRS资源属于一个第一目标SRS资源,当该比特位的取值为0时,指示该比特位对应的SRS资源不属于第一目标SRS资源。对应的,SRI的第二子部分的长度可以根据希望将SRI压缩到的比特位数和第一子部分的长度来确定,例如当希望将SRI压缩到5个比特位,且第一子部分的长度为3个比特位时,第二子部分的长度可以设置为2个比特位,这2个比特位的每种比特状态可以对应一种第二目标SRS资源的组合情况,这2个比特位的各种比特状态与第二目标SRS资源的组合情况的对应关系可以由网络设备和终端设备预定义,也可以在第二配置信息中进行指示,还可以在高层信令中指示,具体不作限定。In an optional implementation manner, the first sub-part of the SRI indication field may indicate the first target SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset in the form of a bitmap. In this case, the first sub-part of the SRI indication field The length of the part is the same as the number M of SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset, and each bit in the first sub-part of the SRI indication field can correspond to one SRS resource in the first SRS resource subset. When the value is 1, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to this bit belongs to a first target SRS resource, and when the value of this bit is 0, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to this bit does not belong to the first target SRS resource. Correspondingly, the length of the second subsection of the SRI can be determined according to the number of bits to which the SRI is expected to be compressed and the length of the first subsection. When the length is 3 bits, the length of the second subsection can be set to 2 bits, and each bit state of these 2 bits can correspond to a combination of the second target SRS resources. The corresponding relationship between the various bit states of the second target SRS resource and the combination of the second target SRS resource may be predefined by the network device and the terminal device, or may be indicated in the second configuration information, or may be indicated in high-level signaling, which is not specifically limited .
表3示例性示出一种第二子部分的各种比特状态与第二目标SRS资源的组合情况的对应关系,该示例将N个SRS资源中的传输性能最强的前M个SRS资源(即SRS 0~SRS M-1)放置在第一SRS资源子集,将N个SRS资源中的传输性能较弱的后N-M个SRS资源(即SRS M~SRS N)放置在第一SRS资源子集:Table 3 exemplarily shows the correspondence between the various bit states of the second subsection and the combination of the second target SRS resources. In this example, the first M SRS resources with the strongest transmission performance among the N SRS resources ( That is, SRS 0~SRS M-1) are placed in the first SRS resource subset, and the next NM SRS resources (ie SRS M~SRS N) with weaker transmission performance among the N SRS resources are placed in the first SRS resource subset. set:
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2020110920-appb-000008
表3table 3
步骤603,网络设备向终端设备发送DL-RS。 Step 603, the network device sends the DL-RS to the terminal device.
步骤604,终端设备对接收到的DL-RS进行下行信道测量,获取下行信道的CSI,并根据下行信道的CSI,计算出N个上行传输所使用的波束,使用N个波束预编码SRS。Step 604, the terminal device performs downlink channel measurement on the received DL-RS, obtains the CSI of the downlink channel, calculates N beams used for uplink transmission according to the CSI of the downlink channel, and uses the N beams to precode the SRS.
步骤605,终端设备将预编码后的SRS发送给网络设备。Step 605, the terminal device sends the precoded SRS to the network device.
步骤606,网络设备根据预编码后的SRS进行信道估计,并计算出终端设备使用每个SRS资源时的上行传输速率,根据信道估计结果和N个SRS资源分别对应的上行传输速率,确定出一个或多个目标SRS资源。Step 606, the network equipment performs channel estimation according to the precoded SRS, and calculates the uplink transmission rate when the terminal equipment uses each SRS resource, and determines an uplink transmission rate corresponding to the channel estimation result and the N SRS resources respectively. or multiple target SRS resources.
步骤603至步骤606的具体实现过程,可以参照图3,此处不再赘述。For the specific implementation process of step 603 to step 606, reference may be made to FIG. 3, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中,网络设备在确定一个或多个目标SRS资源时,可以根据N个SRS资源对应的N个波束的实际传输性能和实际碰撞情况来确定,以尽量避开存在碰撞的波束对应的SRS资源,并尽量调用传输性能较强的波束对应的SRS资源。例如当N个SRS资源为SRS 0~SRS 7时,若SRS 1对应的波束beam1存在波束碰撞情况,则网络设备可以从剩余的SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 3、SRS 4、SRS 5、SRS 6、SRS 7中选择传输性能较强的4个SRS资源(假设终端设备支持4流传输)作为目标SRS资源,即SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 3和SRS 4。In this embodiment of the present application, when determining one or more target SRS resources, the network device may determine it according to the actual transmission performance of the N beams corresponding to the N SRS resources and the actual collision situation, so as to avoid the corresponding beams with collisions as much as possible. and try to call the SRS resources corresponding to the beam with stronger transmission performance. For example, when the N SRS resources are SRS 0 to SRS 7, if the beam 1 corresponding to SRS 1 has a beam collision, the network device can select from the remaining SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 3, SRS 4, SRS 5, SRS 6 , In SRS 7, 4 SRS resources with stronger transmission performance (assuming that the terminal device supports 4-stream transmission) are selected as the target SRS resources, namely SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 3 and SRS 4.
步骤607,网络设备根据第一个资源子集中包括的目标SRS资源,确定SRI指示域中第一子部分的取值,根据第二个资源子集中包括的目标SRS资源,确定SRI指示域中第二子部分的取值。Step 607, the network device determines the value of the first sub-part in the SRI indication field according to the target SRS resources included in the first resource subset, and determines the first sub-section in the SRI indication field according to the target SRS resources included in the second resource subset. The value of the second subsection.
在上述示例中,由于第一个资源子集中包括的目标SRS为SRS 0和SRS 2,因此按照步骤602中的比特位图指示方式,可以确定SRI指示域中第一子部分的比特状态为101。由于第二个资源子集中包括的目标SRS为SRS 3和SRS 4,因此按照表3所示意的对应关系,可以确定SRI指示域中第二子部分的比特状态为10。由此可知,SRI指示域为10110。In the above example, since the target SRS included in the first resource subset are SRS 0 and SRS 2, according to the bitmap indication method in step 602, it can be determined that the bit state of the first subsection in the SRI indication field is 101 . Since the target SRS included in the second resource subset are SRS 3 and SRS 4, according to the corresponding relationship shown in Table 3, it can be determined that the bit state of the second sub-part in the SRI indication field is 10. From this, it can be seen that the SRI indication field is 10110.
在一种可选地实施方式中,第一资源子集中还可能不存在目标SRS资源,这种情况下,按照步骤602中的比特位图指示方式,SRI指示域中第一子部分的每个比特位的取值可以为0。在另一种可选地实施方式中,第二资源子集中还可能不存在目标SRS资源,这种情况下,按照表3所示意的对应关系,SRI指示域中第二子部分的每个比特位的取值也可以为0。In an optional implementation manner, the target SRS resource may not exist in the first resource subset. In this case, according to the bitmap indication method in step 602, the SRI indicates each of the first subsections in the field. The value of the bit can be 0. In another optional implementation manner, the target SRS resource may not exist in the second resource subset. In this case, according to the corresponding relationship shown in Table 3, the SRI indicates each bit of the second sub-part in the field The value of the bit can also be 0.
步骤608,网络设备向终端设备发送DCI,DCI中携带有SRI指示域。Step 608, the network device sends DCI to the terminal device, and the DCI carries the SRI indication field.
步骤609,终端设备根据SRI指示域的第一子部分的取值,从第一SRS资源子集中确定出第一目标SRS资源,根据SRI指示域的第二子部分的取值,从第二SRS资源子集中确定出第二目标SRS资源,将第一目标SRS资源和第二目标SRS资源作为目标SRS资源,使用目标SRS资源对应的波束预编码上行数据。Step 609, the terminal device determines the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset according to the value of the first sub-part of the SRI indication field, and determines the first target SRS resource from the second SRS resource according to the value of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field. The second target SRS resource is determined in the resource subset, the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource are used as the target SRS resource, and the uplink data is precoded by using the beam corresponding to the target SRS resource.
本申请实施例中,当终端设备解析DCI确定SRI指示域为10110时,终端设备可以先 根据第一子部分的长度M(该示例中对应为3)从SRI指示域中确定出第一子部分的比特状态,即101,进而从第一个资源子集确定出第一子部分的比特状态101对应为SRS 0和SRS 2。进一步地,终端设备可以再根据第二子部分的长度(该示例中对应为2)从SRI指示域中确定出第二子部分的比特状态,即10,进而根据表3所示意的对应关系从第二个资源子集中确定出第二子部分的比特状态10对应为SRS 3和SRS 4。因此,目标SRS资源为SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 3和SRS 4。In this embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device parses the DCI and determines that the SRI indication field is 10110, the terminal device may first determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field according to the length M of the first subsection (corresponding to 3 in this example). The bit state of , that is, 101, and then it is determined from the first resource subset that the bit state 101 of the first subpart corresponds to SRS 0 and SRS 2. Further, the terminal device can determine the bit state of the second subsection from the SRI indication field according to the length of the second subsection (corresponding to 2 in this example), that is, 10, and then according to the corresponding relationship shown in Table 3 from In the second resource subset, it is determined that the bit state 10 of the second subsection corresponds to SRS 3 and SRS 4. Therefore, the target SRS resources are SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 3 and SRS 4.
本申请实施例中,“将N个SRS资源划分为第一个资源子集和第二个资源子集”只是一种抽象意义上的描述。在具体实施中,网络设备可以不执行划分操作,而是直接将M的取值发送给终端设备。对应的,终端设备也可以不执行划分操作,而是在接收到SRI指示域后,根据SRI指示域的第一子部分直接从前M个传输性能最好的SRS资源中确定出第一目标SRS资源,并根据SRI指示域的第二子部分直接从后N-M个SRS资源中确定出第二目标SRS资源。In the embodiment of this application, "dividing the N SRS resources into a first resource subset and a second resource subset" is only a description in an abstract sense. In a specific implementation, the network device may not perform the division operation, but directly send the value of M to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device may not perform the division operation, but after receiving the SRI indication field, directly determine the first target SRS resource from the first M SRS resources with the best transmission performance according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field. , and directly determine the second target SRS resource from the next NM SRS resources according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
步骤610,终端设备将预编码后的上行数据发送给网络设备。Step 610, the terminal device sends the precoded uplink data to the network device.
在上述示例中,终端设备可以先将上行数据划分为4流,然后分别使用SRS 0、SRS 2、SRS 3和SRS 4分别对应的波束beam0、beam2、beam3和beam4加权这4流数据,并分别将加权后的这4流数据发送给网络设备。In the above example, the terminal device can first divide the uplink data into 4 streams, and then use the beams beam0, beam2, beam3 and beam4 corresponding to SRS 0, SRS 2, SRS 3 and SRS 4 respectively to weight the 4 streams of data, and respectively The weighted 4-stream data is sent to the network device.
在实施例三中,网络设备将N个SRS资源划分到2个SRS资源子集中,并使用SRI指示域的第一子部分和第二子部分分别指示2个SRS资源子集中的目标SRS资源,这种方式不仅能使网络设备从2个SRS资源子集中综合选择目标SRS资源,还能在合理配置2个SRS资源子集的情况下使SRI指示域的比特位数之和小于N,相比于直接使用N个比特位指示N个SRS资源的方式来说,有助于降低SRI指示域的比特位数,相应降低携带SRI指示域的DCI的数据量,提高DCI传输的可靠性。更进一步的,将强传输性能的SRS资源和弱传输性能的SRS资源分别划分在不同的SRS资源子集中,并分别从不同的SRS资源子集中调用不同传输性能的SRS资源,使得网络设备能够按照SRS资源的传输性能的强弱情况进行SRS资源的调度,既能有助于网络设备尽可能调度更多的强传输性能的SRS资源,又能在强传输性能的SRS资源存在波束碰撞时让网络设备调度弱传输性能的SRS资源,从而能够兼顾到调度强传输性能的SRS资源和规避其它波束干扰的能力,便于后续终端设备以较好的上行传输能力传输不被其它终端设备的波束干扰的上行数据。In the third embodiment, the network device divides the N SRS resources into 2 SRS resource subsets, and uses the first sub-part and the second sub-part of the SRI indication field to respectively indicate the target SRS resources in the 2 SRS resource subsets, This method not only enables the network device to comprehensively select the target SRS resource from the two SRS resource subsets, but also makes the sum of the bits of the SRI indication field less than N when the two SRS resource subsets are reasonably configured. In the way of directly using N bits to indicate N SRS resources, it is helpful to reduce the number of bits of the SRI indication field, correspondingly reduce the data amount of the DCI carrying the SRI indication field, and improve the reliability of DCI transmission. Further, the SRS resources with strong transmission performance and the SRS resources with weak transmission performance are divided into different SRS resource subsets respectively, and SRS resources with different transmission performances are called from different SRS resource subsets respectively, so that the network device can follow the Scheduling of SRS resources based on the transmission performance of the SRS resources can not only help the network equipment to schedule as many SRS resources with strong transmission performance as possible, but also allow the network to The equipment schedules SRS resources with weak transmission performance, so that it can take into account the ability to schedule SRS resources with strong transmission performance and the ability to avoid interference from other beams, so that subsequent terminal equipment can transmit uplink transmission with better uplink transmission capability that is not interfered by the beams of other terminal equipment. data.
需要说明的是,在实施例三中,“将N个SRS资源划分到两个SRS资源子集中”只是一种可选地实施方式,在其它可选地实施方式中,也可以将N个SRS资源划分到三个或三个以上的SRS资源子集中,这三个或三个以上的SRS资源子集中的SRS资源的传输性能依次降低。这种情况下,SRI指示域中可以包括三个或三个以上的子部分,每个子部分对应一个资源子集。该种实施方式能够对N个SRS资源进行更细粒度的划分,有助于网络设备更均衡地调度不同传输性能的SRS资源。It should be noted that, in the third embodiment, "dividing the N SRS resources into two SRS resource subsets" is only an optional implementation. In other optional implementations, the N SRS resources may also be divided into two subsets. The resources are divided into three or more SRS resource subsets, and the transmission performance of the SRS resources in the three or more SRS resource subsets decreases sequentially. In this case, the SRI indication field may include three or more subsections, and each subsection corresponds to a resource subset. This embodiment can perform more fine-grained division on the N SRS resources, which helps the network device to schedule SRS resources with different transmission performance in a more balanced manner.
需要说明的是,上述各个信息的名称仅仅是作为示例,随着通信技术的演变,上述任意信息均可能改变其名称,但不管其名称如何发生变化,只要其含义与本申请上述信息的含义相同,则均落入本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that the names of the above information are only examples. With the evolution of communication technology, any of the above information may change its name, but no matter how the name changes, as long as its meaning is the same as the meaning of the above information in this application , all fall within the protection scope of this application.
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,上述实现各网元为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算 法步骤,本发明能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solution provided by the present application from the perspective of interaction between various network elements. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, each network element in the above-mentioned implementation includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that, in conjunction with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present invention can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of the present invention.
根据前述方法,图7为本申请实施例提供的信息指示装置的结构示意图,如图7所示,该信息指示装置可以为终端设备或网络设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于终端设备的芯片或电路,再比如可设置于网络设备内的芯片或电路。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of an information indicating device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7 , the information indicating device may be a terminal device or a network device, or may be a chip or a circuit, for example, it may be provided in a terminal A chip or circuit of a device, for example, a chip or circuit that can be provided in a network device.
进一步的,该信息指示装置701还可以进一步包括总线系统,其中,处理器702、存储器704、收发器703可以通过总线系统相连。Further, the information indicating device 701 may further include a bus system, wherein the processor 702, the memory 704, and the transceiver 703 may be connected through the bus system.
应理解,上述处理器702可以是一个芯片。例如,该处理器702可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the above-mentioned processor 702 may be a chip. For example, the processor 702 may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a system on chip (SoC). It can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller). unit, MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器702中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器702中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器704,处理器702读取存储器704中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 702 or an instruction in the form of software. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor 702 . The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory 704, and the processor 702 reads the information in the memory 704, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器702可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor 702 in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器704可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存 取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory 704 in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
该信息指示装置701对应上述方法中的终端设备的情况下,该信息指示装置可以包括处理器702、收发器703和存储器704。该存储器704用于存储指令,该处理器702用于执行该存储器704存储的指令,以实现如上图1至图6中所示的任一项或任多项对应的方法中终端设备的相关方案。When the information indicating device 701 corresponds to the terminal device in the above method, the information indicating device may include a processor 702 , a transceiver 703 and a memory 704 . The memory 704 is used for storing instructions, and the processor 702 is used for executing the instructions stored in the memory 704, so as to implement the relevant solution of the terminal device in the corresponding method of any one or any of the items shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 above. .
当信息指示装置701为上述终端设备,信息指示装置701可以用于执行上述实施例一至实施例三中任一实施例中终端设备所执行的方法。When the information indicating device 701 is the above-mentioned terminal device, the information indicating device 701 may be configured to execute the method executed by the terminal device in any one of the first embodiment to the third embodiment.
信息指示装置701为上述终端设备,且执行实施例一时,收发器703可以接收网络设备发送的第一信息,处理器702可以根据第一信息中携带的探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从K个探测参考信号SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源,并使用目标SRS资源确定PUSCH传输所使用的预编码。其中,第一信息中包括SRI指示域,SRI指示域包括至少一个子部分,SRI指示域通过指示目标探测参考信号SRS资源,令终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,目标SRS资源为终端设备发送SRS时使用的N个SRS资源中的一个或多个,N个SRS资源用于得到K个SRS资源子集,K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源,K、N为正整数,K≤N。The information indicating device 701 is the above-mentioned terminal device, and when the first embodiment is implemented, the transceiver 703 may receive the first information sent by the network device, and the processor 702 may identify at least one of the SRI indication fields according to the sounding reference signal resource carried in the first information In the subsection, the target SRS resource is determined from the K sounding reference signal SRS resource subsets, and the target SRS resource is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission. The first information includes an SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target sounding reference signal SRS resource to enable the terminal equipment to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS The resource is one or more of N SRS resources used by the terminal device when sending SRS, the N SRS resources are used to obtain K SRS resource subsets, and each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes N SRS resources For one or more SRS resources in the SRS resources, K and N are positive integers, and K≤N.
该信息指示装置701对应上述方法中的终端设备的情况下,该信息指示装置可以包括处理器702、收发器703和存储器704。该存储器704用于存储指令,该处理器702用于执行该存储器704存储的指令,以实现如上图1至图6中所示的任一项或任多项对应的方法中终端设备的相关方案。When the information indicating device 701 corresponds to the terminal device in the above method, the information indicating device may include a processor 702 , a transceiver 703 and a memory 704 . The memory 704 is used for storing instructions, and the processor 702 is used for executing the instructions stored in the memory 704, so as to implement the relevant solution of the terminal device in the corresponding method of any one or any of the items shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 above. .
当信息指示装置701为上述网络设备,信息指示装置701可以用于执行上述实施例一至实施例三中任一实施例中网络设备所执行的方法。When the information indicating device 701 is the foregoing network device, the information indicating device 701 may be configured to execute the method executed by the network device in any one of the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 3.
信息指示装置701为上述网络设备,且执行实施例一时,处理器702可以根据终端设备发送探测参考信号SRS时使用的N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集,收发器703可以向终端设备发送第一信息,并接收终端设备使用预编码进行物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输的上行数据。其中,第一信息中包括探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域,SRI指示域包括至少一个子部分,SRI指示域通过指示目标SRS资源,令终端设备确定PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,目标SRS资源为N个SRS资源中的一个或多个,K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源,K、N为正整数,K≤N。The information indicating device 701 is the above-mentioned network device, and when the first embodiment is implemented, the processor 702 can obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources used when the terminal device sends the sounding reference signal SRS, and the transceiver 703 can send to the terminal device. The first information is received, and the terminal equipment uses precoding to perform physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission uplink data. The first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target SRS resource to enable the terminal device to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS resource is One or more of the N SRS resources, each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes one or more SRS resources of the N SRS resources, K and N are positive integers, and K≤N.
该信息指示装置所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For the concepts related to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application involved in the information indication device, please refer to the descriptions of the foregoing methods or other embodiments for explanations and detailed descriptions and other steps, which will not be repeated here.
根据前述方法,图8为本申请实施例提供的信息指示装置的结构示意图,如图8所示,信息指示装置801可以包括通信接口803、处理器802和存储器804。所述通信接口803,用于输入和/或输出信息;所述处理器802,用于执行计算机程序或指令,使得信息指示装置801实现上述图1至图6的相关方案中终端设备侧的方法,或使得信息指示装置801实现上述图1至图6的相关方案中网络设备侧的方法。本申请实施例中,通信接口803可以实现上述图7的收发器703所实现的方案,处理器802可以实现上述图7的处理器702所 实现的方案,存储器804可以实现上述图7的存储器704所实现的方案,在此不再赘述。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an information indication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8 , an information indication apparatus 801 may include a communication interface 803 , a processor 802 and a memory 804 . The communication interface 803 is used for inputting and/or outputting information; the processor 802 is used for executing a computer program or instruction, so that the information indicating device 801 implements the method on the terminal device side in the above-mentioned related solutions of FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 , or make the information indicating device 801 implement the method on the network device side in the above-mentioned related solutions of FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 . In this embodiment of the present application, the communication interface 803 can implement the solution implemented by the transceiver 703 in FIG. 7 , the processor 802 can implement the solution implemented by the processor 702 in FIG. 7 , and the memory 804 can implement the memory 704 in FIG. 7 . The implemented solution will not be repeated here.
基于以上实施例以及相同构思,图9为本申请实施例提供的信息指示装置的示意图,如图9所示,该信息指示装置901可以为终端设备或网络设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于终端设备或网络设备的芯片或电路。Based on the above embodiments and the same concept, FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an information indicating apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9 , the information indicating apparatus 901 may be a terminal device or a network device, or may be a chip or a circuit, such as Chips or circuits that can be installed in terminal equipment or network equipment.
该信息指示装置可以对应上述方法中的终端设备。该信息指示装置可以实现如上图1至图6中所示的任一项或任多项对应的方法中终端设备所执行的步骤。该信息指示装置可以包括处理单元902和收发单元903。The information indicating device may correspond to the terminal device in the above method. The information indicating apparatus may implement the steps performed by the terminal device in any one or more of the corresponding methods shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 above. The information indicating device may include a processing unit 902 and a transceiving unit 903 .
当信息指示装置901为上述终端设备,收发单元903在发送信息时可以为发送单元或发射器,收发单元903在接收信息时可以为接收单元或接收器,收发单元903可以为收发器,此收发器、发射器或接收器可以为射频电路,当信息指示装置901包含存储单元时,该存储单元用于存储计算机指令,处理单元902与存储单元通信连接,处理单元902执行存储单元存储的计算机指令,使信息指示装置901可以用于执行上述实施例一至实施例三中任一实施例中终端设备所执行的方法。其中,处理单元902可以是一个通用中央处理器(CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(Application Specific Intergrated Circuit,ASIC)。When the information indicating device 901 is the above-mentioned terminal device, the transceiver unit 903 can be a sending unit or a transmitter when sending information, the transceiver unit 903 can be a receiving unit or a receiver when receiving information, and the transceiver unit 903 can be a transceiver. The transmitter, transmitter or receiver can be a radio frequency circuit, when the information indicating device 901 includes a storage unit, the storage unit is used to store computer instructions, the processing unit 902 is connected in communication with the storage unit, and the processing unit 902 executes the computer instructions stored in the storage unit , so that the information indicating apparatus 901 can be used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in any one of the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 3. The processing unit 902 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC).
信息指示装置901为上述终端设备,且执行实施例一时,收发单元903可以接收网络设备发送的第一信息,处理单元902可以根据第一信息中携带的探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从K个探测参考信号SRS资源子集中确定出目标SRS资源,并使用目标SRS资源确定PUSCH传输所使用的预编码。其中,第一信息中包括SRI指示域,SRI指示域包括至少一个子部分,SRI指示域通过指示目标探测参考信号SRS资源,令终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,目标SRS资源为终端设备发送SRS时使用的N个SRS资源中的一个或多个,N个SRS资源用于得到K个SRS资源子集,K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源,K、N为正整数,K≤N。The information indicating device 901 is the above-mentioned terminal device, and when the first embodiment is implemented, the transceiver unit 903 may receive the first information sent by the network device, and the processing unit 902 may identify at least one of the SRI indication fields according to the sounding reference signal resource carried in the first information In the subsection, the target SRS resource is determined from the K sounding reference signal SRS resource subsets, and the target SRS resource is used to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission. The first information includes an SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target sounding reference signal SRS resource to enable the terminal equipment to determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS The resource is one or more of N SRS resources used by the terminal device when sending SRS, the N SRS resources are used to obtain K SRS resource subsets, and each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes N SRS resources For one or more SRS resources in the SRS resources, K and N are positive integers, and K≤N.
当信息指示装置901为上述网络设备,收发单元903在发送信息时可以为发送单元或发射器,收发单元903在接收信息时可以为接收单元或接收器,收发单元903可以为收发器,此收发器、发射器或接收器可以为射频电路,当信息指示装置901包含存储单元时,该存储单元用于存储计算机指令,该处理器与存储器通信连接,处理器执行存储器存储的计算机指令,使信息指示装置901可以用于执行上述实施例一至实施例三中任一实施例中网络设备所执行的方法。其中,处理器可以是一个通用中央处理器(CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(Application Specific Intergrated Circuit,ASIC)。When the information indicating device 901 is the above-mentioned network device, the transceiver unit 903 can be a sending unit or a transmitter when sending information, the transceiver unit 903 can be a receiving unit or a receiver when receiving information, and the transceiver unit 903 can be a transceiver. The transmitter, transmitter or receiver can be a radio frequency circuit, when the information indicating device 901 includes a storage unit, the storage unit is used to store computer instructions, the processor is connected in communication with the memory, and the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory to make the information The instructing apparatus 901 may be configured to execute the method executed by the network device in any one of the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 3. The processor may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, or an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC).
信息指示装置901为上述网络设备,且执行实施例一时,处理单元902可以根据终端设备发送探测参考信号SRS时使用的N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集,收发单元903可以向终端设备发送第一信息,并接收终端设备使用预编码进行物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输的上行数据。其中,第一信息中包括探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域,SRI指示域包括至少一个子部分,SRI指示域通过指示目标SRS资源,令终端设备确定PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,目标SRS资源为N个SRS资源中的一个或多个,K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源,K、N为正整数,K≤N。The information indicating device 901 is the above-mentioned network device, and when the first embodiment is implemented, the processing unit 902 can obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources used when the terminal device sends the sounding reference signal SRS, and the transceiver unit 903 can send to the terminal device. The first information is received, and the terminal equipment uses precoding to perform physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission uplink data. The first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target SRS resource to enable the terminal device to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission, and the target SRS resource is One or more of the N SRS resources, each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes one or more SRS resources of the N SRS resources, K and N are positive integers, and K≤N.
当信息指示装置901为芯片时,收发单元903可以是输入和/或输出接口、管脚或电路等。处理单元902可执行存储单元存储的计算机执行指令,以使该信息指示装置901内的 芯片执行实施例一至实施例三中任一实施例所执行的方法。可选地,存储单元为芯片内的存储单元,如寄存器、缓存等,存储单元还可以是信息指示装置901内的位于该芯片外部的存储单元,如只读存储器(Read Only Memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)等。When the information indicates that the device 901 is a chip, the transceiver unit 903 may be an input and/or output interface, a pin or a circuit, or the like. The processing unit 902 can execute the computer-executable instructions stored in the storage unit, so that the information instructs the chip in the device 901 to execute the method executed in any of the first to third embodiments. Optionally, the storage unit is a storage unit in a chip, such as a register, a cache, etc., and the storage unit can also be a storage unit located outside the chip in the information indicating device 901, such as a read-only memory (Read Only Memory, ROM) or Other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, such as Random Access Memory (RAM).
该信息指示装置901所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For the concepts related to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application involved in the information indicating device 901, please refer to the descriptions of the foregoing methods or other embodiments for explanations, detailed descriptions and other steps, which will not be repeated here.
可以理解的是,上述信息指示装置901中各个单元的功能可以参考相应方法实施例的实现,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that, the functions of each unit in the above-mentioned information indicating apparatus 901 may refer to the implementation of the corresponding method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,以上信息指示装置901的单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。本申请实施例中,收发单元903可以由上述图7的收发器703实现,处理单元902可以由上述图7的处理器702实现。It should be understood that the division of the units of the above information indicating apparatus 901 is only a division of logical functions, and may be fully or partially integrated into a physical entity in actual implementation, or may be physically separated. In this embodiment of the present application, the transceiver unit 903 may be implemented by the transceiver 703 shown in FIG. 7 above, and the processing unit 902 may be implemented by the processor 702 shown in FIG. 7 above.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图1至图6所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the steps shown in FIGS. 1 to 6 . The method of any one of the illustrated embodiments.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图1至图6所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are executed on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIG. 1 to FIG. 6 . The method of any one of the illustrated embodiments.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application further provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disc,SSD))等。In the above-mentioned embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, high-density digital video discs (DVDs)), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state discs, SSD)) etc.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in the above apparatus embodiments corresponds to the terminal equipment and the network equipment or terminal equipment in the method embodiments, and corresponding steps are performed by corresponding modules or units, for example, the communication unit (transceiver) performs the receiving or sending in the method embodiments. The steps other than sending and receiving can be performed by the processing unit (processor). For functions of specific units, reference may be made to corresponding method embodiments. The number of processors may be one or more.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图 示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在两个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system" and the like are used in this specification to refer to a computer-related entity, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer. By way of illustration, both an application running on a computing device and the computing device may be components. One or more components may reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component may be localized on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers. In addition, these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. A component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step),能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the various illustrative logical blocks and steps described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware accomplish. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working process of the above-described systems, devices and units may refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited to this. should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (30)

  1. 一种信息指示方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An information indication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    接收网络设备发送的第一信息,所述第一信息中包括探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域,所述SRI指示域包括至少一个子部分,所述SRI指示域通过指示目标探测参考信号SRS资源,令终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码;所述目标SRS资源为所述终端设备发送SRS时使用的N个SRS资源中的一个或多个,所述N个SRS资源用于得到K个SRS资源子集,所述K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源;K、N为正整数,K≤N;receiving first information sent by a network device, the first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one sub-part, and the SRI indication field indicates a target sounding reference signal SRS resource, Let the terminal equipment determine the precoding used for the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission; the target SRS resource is one or more of the N SRS resources used by the terminal equipment when sending SRS, and the N SRS resources are used for Obtaining K SRS resource subsets, each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes one or more SRS resources in the N SRS resources; K and N are positive integers, and K≤N;
    根据所述SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从所述K个SRS资源子集中确定出所述目标SRS资源;determining the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-portion of the SRI indication field;
    使用所述目标SRS资源确定所述PUSCH传输所使用的预编码。The precoding used for the PUSCH transmission is determined using the target SRS resource.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接收网络设备发送的第一信息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein before the receiving the first information sent by the network device, the method further comprises:
    接收所述网络设备发送的配置信息;所述配置信息用于指示所述K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包含的SRS资源。Receive configuration information sent by the network device; the configuration information is used to indicate the SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述K大于或等于2,则:The method of claim 2, wherein when the K is greater than or equal to 2, then:
    所述至少一个子部分包括第一子部分和第二子部分,所述第一子部分用于指示所述K个SRS资源子集中的一个SRS资源子集,所述第二子部分用于指示所述一个SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源;The at least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used to indicate one SRS resource subset in the K SRS resource subsets, and the second subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in the one SRS resource subset;
    所述根据所述SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从所述K个SRS资源子集中确定出所述目标SRS资源,包括:The determining the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-portion of the SRI indication field includes:
    根据所述SRI指示域的第一子部分,从所述K个SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源子集;determining a target SRS resource subset from the K SRS resource subsets according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field;
    根据所述SRI指示域的第二子部分,从所述目标SRS资源子集中确定所述目标SRS资源。The target SRS resource is determined from the subset of target SRS resources according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个SRS资源子集的任意两个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量相同;所述K的取值由高层信令配置或预定义;The method according to claim 3, wherein the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same; the value of K is configured by high-level signaling or preset. definition;
    所述接收所述网络设备发送的配置信息之后,还包括:After receiving the configuration information sent by the network device, the method further includes:
    根据所述K的取值,确定第一比特位数;所述第一比特位数用于从所述SRI指示域中确定出所述第一子部分;According to the value of the K, determine the first number of bits; the first number of bits is used to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field;
    根据每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量,确定第二比特位数;所述第二比特位数用于从所述SRI指示域中确定出所述第二子部分;According to the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset, a second number of bits is determined; the second number of bits is used to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field;
    其中,所述第一比特位数和所述第二比特位数的和等于所述SRI指示域的比特位数。Wherein, the sum of the first number of bits and the second number of bits is equal to the number of bits of the SRI indication field.
  5. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 3, wherein the method further comprises:
    由高层信令配置或预定义第一比特位数和第二比特位数;所述第一比特位数用于从所述SRI指示域中确定出所述第一子部分,所述第二比特位数用于从所述SRI指示域中确定出所述第二子部分。The first bit number and the second bit number are configured or pre-defined by high-level signaling; the first bit number is used to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, the second bit number The number of bits is used to determine the second subsection from the SRI indication field.
  6. 如权利要求2至5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述K为1,则:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 5, wherein when the K is 1, then:
    所述SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中的L个SRS资源,所述SRI指示域的 比特位数为L,L个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成所述L个比特的一种比特状态,L个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源对应所述L个比特的一种比特状态;L为小于N的正整数;The SRS resource subset includes L SRS resources in the N SRS resources, the number of bits of the SRI indication field is L, and a combination of the values of each bit in the L bits constitutes the L A bit state of bits, one or more of the L SRS resources corresponds to a bit state of the L bits; L is a positive integer less than N;
    所述根据所述SRI的至少一个子部分,从所述K个SRS资源子集中确定出所述目标SRS资源,包括:The determining the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI includes:
    根据所述SRI指示域的L个比特的比特状态,从所述L个SRS资源中确定所述目标SRS资源。The target SRS resource is determined from the L SRS resources according to the bit state of the L bits of the SRI indication field.
  7. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述K为2,则:The method of claim 2, wherein when the K is 2, then:
    所述K个SRS资源子集包括第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集,所述第一SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中的M个SRS资源,所述第二SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中除所述M个SRS资源以外的N-M个SRS资源;M为小于N的正整数;The K SRS resource subsets include a first SRS resource subset and a second SRS resource subset, the first SRS resource subset includes M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, and the second SRS resource subset The resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources in the N SRS resources; M is a positive integer less than N;
    所述至少一个子部分包括第一子部分和第二子部分,所述第一子部分用于指示所述第一SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源,所述第二子部分用于指示所述第二SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源;The at least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used for indicating one or more SRS resources in the second subset of SRS resources;
    所述根据所述SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从所述K个SRS资源子集中确定出所述目标SRS资源,包括:The determining the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-portion of the SRI indication field includes:
    根据所述SRI指示域的第一子部分,从所述第一SRS资源子集中确定第一目标SRS资源;determining a first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field;
    根据所述SRI指示域的第二子部分,从所述第二SRS资源子集中确定第二目标SRS资源;determining a second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field;
    将所述第一目标SRS资源和第二目标SRS资源作为所述一个或多个目标SRS资源。The first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource are used as the one or more target SRS resources.
  8. 如权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息用于指示所述M;The method of claim 7, wherein the configuration information is used to indicate the M;
    所述接收所述网络设备发送的配置信息之后,还包括:After receiving the configuration information sent by the network device, the method further includes:
    根据所述M将所述N个SRS资源划分到所述第一SRS资源子集和所述第二SRS资源子集中。The N SRS resources are divided into the first SRS resource subset and the second SRS resource subset according to the M.
  9. 如权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一子部分的长度为M比特,所述M比特中的每个比特对应所述M个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,当所述M比特中的第一比特的取值为第一值时,指示使用所述第一比特对应的SRS资源确定所述PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,所述第一比特为所述M比特中的任一比特;The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the length of the first subsection is M bits, and each bit in the M bits corresponds to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, when When the value of the first bit in the M bits is the first value, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for the PUSCH transmission, and the first bit is the M bit any bit in;
    所述根据所述SRI指示域的第一子部分,从所述第一SRS资源子集中确定第一目标SRS资源,包括:The determining of the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field includes:
    将所述第一子部分中取值为第一值的比特位对应的SRS资源作为所述第一目标SRS资源。The SRS resource corresponding to the bit whose value is the first value in the first subsection is used as the first target SRS resource.
  10. 如权利要求7至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二子部分包括一个或多个比特,所述一个或多个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成所述第二子部分的一种比特状态;所述配置信息还用于指示从所述第二SRS资源子集中选取SRS资源的数量对应的所述第二子部分的比特状态;The method according to any one of claims 7 to 9, wherein the second sub-part comprises one or more bits, and a combination of the value of each bit in the one or more bits A bit state constituting the second sub-part; the configuration information is also used to indicate the bit state of the second sub-part corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource subset;
    所述根据所述SRI指示域的第二子部分,从所述第二SRS资源子集中确定第二目标SRS资源,包括:The determining of the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field includes:
    根据所述SRI指示域的第二子部分的比特状态,从所述第二SRS资源子集中选取出所 述比特状态对应的数量的SRS资源,作为所述第二目标SRS资源。According to the bit state of the second sub-part of the SRI indication field, the number of SRS resources corresponding to the bit state is selected from the second SRS resource subset as the second target SRS resource.
  11. 一种信息指示方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An information indication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    根据终端设备发送探测参考信号SRS时使用的N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集;所述K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源;K、N为正整数,K≤N;K SRS resource subsets are obtained according to the N SRS resources used by the terminal device to send the sounding reference signal SRS; each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes one or more of the N SRS resources SRS resources; K, N are positive integers, K≤N;
    向终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息中包括探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域,所述SRI指示域包括至少一个子部分,所述SRI指示域通过指示目标SRS资源,令所述终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码;所述目标SRS资源为所述N个SRS资源中的一个或多个;Sending first information to the terminal device, where the first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field indicates the target SRS resource to make the terminal The device determines the precoding used for physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission; the target SRS resource is one or more of the N SRS resources;
    接收所述终端设备使用所述预编码进行所述PUSCH传输的上行数据。Receive the uplink data that the terminal device uses the precoding to transmit the PUSCH.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向终端设备发送第一信息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein before the sending the first information to the terminal device, the method further comprises:
    向所述终端设备发送配置信息;所述配置信息用于指示所述K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源。Send configuration information to the terminal device; the configuration information is used to indicate the SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述K大于或等于2,则所述至少一个子部分包括第一子部分和第二子部分,所述第一子部分用于所述终端设备从所述K个SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源子集,所述第二子部分用于所述终端设备从所述目标SRS资源子集中确定所述目标SRS资源。13. The method of claim 12, wherein when the K is greater than or equal to 2, the at least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection being used for the The terminal device determines a target SRS resource subset from the K SRS resource subsets, and the second subsection is used for the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the target SRS resource subset.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个SRS资源子集的任意两个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量相同;The method of claim 13, wherein the number of SRS resources included in any two SRS resource subsets of the K SRS resource subsets is the same;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    通过高层信令配置或预定义所述K的取值,所述K的取值用于所述终端设备确定第一比特位数,每个SRS资源子集中包括的SRS资源的数量用于所述终端设备确定第二比特位数;或者,The value of K is configured or pre-defined by high-level signaling, and the value of K is used by the terminal device to determine the first number of bits, and the number of SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset is used for the The terminal device determines the second number of bits; or,
    通过高层信令配置或预定义所述第一比特位数和所述第二比特位数;Configure or pre-define the first bit number and the second bit number through higher layer signaling;
    其中,所述第一比特位数用于所述终端设备从所述SRI指示域中确定出所述第一子部分,所述第二比特位数用于所述终端设备从所述SRI指示域中确定出所述第二子部分。The first number of bits is used by the terminal device to determine the first subsection from the SRI indication field, and the second number of bits is used by the terminal device from the SRI indication field identified in the second subsection.
  15. 如权利要求12至14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述K为1,则:The method according to any one of claims 12 to 14, wherein when the K is 1, then:
    所述SRI指示域的比特位数为L,L个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成所述L个比特的一种比特状态,L为小于N的正整数;The number of bits of the SRI indication field is L, and a combination of the value of each bit in the L bits constitutes a bit state of the L bits, and L is a positive integer less than N;
    所述根据所述N个SRS资源得到所述K个SRS资源子集,包括:The obtaining the K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources includes:
    从所述N个SRS资源中选取L个SRS资源,构成所述SRS资源子集;所述L个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源对应所述L个比特的一种比特状态,所述SRI指示域的L个比特的比特状态用于所述终端设备从所述L个SRS资源中确定所述目标SRS资源。L SRS resources are selected from the N SRS resources to form the SRS resource subset; one or more SRS resources in the L SRS resources correspond to a bit state of the L bits, and the The bit status of the L bits of the SRI indication field is used by the terminal device to determine the target SRS resource from the L SRS resources.
  16. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述K为2,则:The method of claim 12, wherein when the K is 2, then:
    所述配置信息用于指示M;所述M用于所述终端设备将所述N个SRS资源划分至第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集中;所述第一SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中的M个SRS资源,所述第二SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中除所述M个SRS资源以外的N-M个SRS资源;M为小于N的正整数;The configuration information is used to indicate M; the M is used by the terminal device to divide the N SRS resources into a first SRS resource subset and a second SRS resource subset; the first SRS resource subset includes M SRS resources in the N SRS resources, the second SRS resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources in the N SRS resources; M is a positive integer less than N ;
    所述至少一个子部分包括第一子部分和第二子部分,所述第一子部分用于所述终端设 备从第一SRS资源子集中确定出第一目标SRS资源,所述第二子部分用于所述终端设备从第二SRS资源子集中确定出第二目标SRS资源,所述第一目标SRS资源和所述第二目标SRS资源构成所述目标SRS资源。The at least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used for the terminal device to determine the first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection for the terminal device to determine a second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset, and the first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource constitute the target SRS resource.
  17. 如权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一子部分的长度为M比特,所述M比特中的每个比特对应所述M个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,当所述M比特中的第一比特的取值为第一值时,指示使用所述第一比特对应的SRS资源确定所述PUSCH传输所使用的预编码,所述第一比特为所述M比特中的任一比特;The method of claim 16, wherein the length of the first subsection is M bits, and each bit in the M bits corresponds to one SRS resource in the M SRS resources, and when the When the value of the first bit in the M bits is the first value, it indicates that the SRS resource corresponding to the first bit is used to determine the precoding used for the PUSCH transmission, and the first bit is the SRS resource in the M bits. any bit;
    所述M个比特的比特状态用于所述终端设备将所述第一子部分中取值为第一值的比特位对应的SRS资源作为所述第一目标SRS资源。The bit state of the M bits is used by the terminal device to use the SRS resource corresponding to the bit value of the first value in the first subsection as the first target SRS resource.
  18. 如权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二子部分包括一个或多个比特,所述一个或多个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成所述第二子部分的一种比特状态;The method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the second sub-part comprises one or more bits, and a combination of the values of each of the one or more bits constitutes the first A bit state of the two subsections;
    所述配置信息还用于指示从所述第二SRS资源子集中选取SRS资源的数量对应的所述第二子部分的比特状态;所述SRI指示域的第二子部分的比特状态用于所述终端设备从所述第二SRS资源子集中选取出所述第二目标SRS资源。The configuration information is also used to indicate the bit status of the second subsection corresponding to the number of SRS resources selected from the second SRS resource subset; the bit status of the second subsection of the SRI indication field is used for all The terminal equipment selects the second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset.
  19. 一种信息指示装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括:An information indicating device, characterized in that the device comprises:
    收发单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一信息,所述第一信息中包括探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域,所述SRI指示域包括至少一个子部分,所述SRI指示域通过指示目标探测参考信号SRS资源,令终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码;所述目标SRS资源为所述终端设备发送SRS时使用的N个SRS资源中的一个或多个,所述N个SRS资源用于得到K个SRS资源子集,所述K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源;K、N为正整数,K≤N;A transceiver unit, configured to receive first information sent by a network device, where the first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier (SRI) indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one subsection, and the SRI indication field is detected by indicating a target The reference signal SRS resource enables the terminal device to determine the precoding used for PUSCH transmission on the physical uplink shared channel; the target SRS resource is one or more of the N SRS resources used by the terminal device when sending SRS, and the N The SRS resources are used to obtain K SRS resource subsets, and each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes one or more SRS resources in the N SRS resources; K and N are positive integers , K≤N;
    处理单元,用于根据所述SRI指示域的至少一个子部分,从所述K个SRS资源子集中确定出所述目标SRS资源,并使用所述目标SRS资源确定所述PUSCH传输所使用的预编码。A processing unit, configured to determine the target SRS resource from the K SRS resource subsets according to at least one sub-part of the SRI indication field, and use the target SRS resource to determine the preset used for the PUSCH transmission coding.
  20. 如权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元接收网络设备发送的第一信息之前,还用于:The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein before the transceiver unit receives the first information sent by the network device, it is further configured to:
    接收所述网络设备发送的配置信息;所述配置信息用于指示所述K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包含的SRS资源。Receive configuration information sent by the network device; the configuration information is used to indicate the SRS resources included in each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets.
  21. 如权利要求19或20所述的装置,其特征在于,当所述K大于或等于2,则:The device according to claim 19 or 20, wherein when the K is greater than or equal to 2, then:
    所述至少一个子部分包括第一子部分和第二子部分,所述第一子部分用于指示所述K个SRS资源子集中的一个SRS资源子集,所述第二子部分用于指示所述一个SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源;The at least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used to indicate one SRS resource subset in the K SRS resource subsets, and the second subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in the one SRS resource subset;
    所述处理单元具体用于:The processing unit is specifically used for:
    根据所述SRI指示域的第一子部分,从所述K个SRS资源子集中确定目标SRS资源子集;determining a target SRS resource subset from the K SRS resource subsets according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field;
    根据所述SRI指示域的第二子部分,从所述目标SRS资源子集中确定所述目标SRS资源。The target SRS resource is determined from the subset of target SRS resources according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field.
  22. 如权利要求19至21中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,当所述K为1,则:The device according to any one of claims 19 to 21, wherein when the K is 1, then:
    所述SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中的L个SRS资源,所述SRI指示域的 比特位数为L,L个比特中每个比特的取值的一种组合构成所述L个比特的一种比特状态,L个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源对应所述L个比特的一种比特状态;L为小于N的正整数;The SRS resource subset includes L SRS resources in the N SRS resources, the number of bits of the SRI indication field is L, and a combination of the values of each bit in the L bits constitutes the L A bit state of bits, one or more of the L SRS resources corresponds to a bit state of the L bits; L is a positive integer less than N;
    所述处理单元具体用于:The processing unit is specifically used for:
    根据所述SRI指示域的L个比特的比特状态,从所述L个SRS资源中确定所述目标SRS资源。The target SRS resource is determined from the L SRS resources according to the bit state of the L bits of the SRI indication field.
  23. 如权利要求19或20所述的装置,其特征在于,当所述K为2,则:The device according to claim 19 or 20, wherein when the K is 2, then:
    所述K个SRS资源子集包括第一SRS资源子集和第二SRS资源子集,所述第一SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中的M个SRS资源,所述第二SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中除所述M个SRS资源以外的N-M个SRS资源;M为小于N的正整数;The K SRS resource subsets include a first SRS resource subset and a second SRS resource subset, the first SRS resource subset includes M SRS resources among the N SRS resources, and the second SRS resource subset The resource subset includes NM SRS resources other than the M SRS resources in the N SRS resources; M is a positive integer less than N;
    所述至少一个子部分包括第一子部分和第二子部分,所述第一子部分用于指示所述第一SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源,所述第二子部分用于指示所述第二SRS资源子集中的一个或多个SRS资源;The at least one subsection includes a first subsection and a second subsection, the first subsection is used to indicate one or more SRS resources in the first SRS resource subset, and the second subsection is used for indicating one or more SRS resources in the second subset of SRS resources;
    所述处理单元具体用于:The processing unit is specifically used for:
    根据所述SRI指示域的第一子部分,从所述第一SRS资源子集中确定第一目标SRS资源;determining a first target SRS resource from the first SRS resource subset according to the first sub-part of the SRI indication field;
    根据所述SRI指示域的第二子部分,从所述第二SRS资源子集中确定第二目标SRS资源;determining a second target SRS resource from the second SRS resource subset according to the second sub-part of the SRI indication field;
    将所述第一目标SRS资源和第二目标SRS资源作为所述一个或多个目标SRS资源。The first target SRS resource and the second target SRS resource are used as the one or more target SRS resources.
  24. 一种信息指示装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括:An information indicating device, characterized in that the device comprises:
    处理单元,用于根据终端设备发送探测参考信号SRS时使用的N个SRS资源得到K个SRS资源子集;所述K个SRS资源子集的每个SRS资源子集中包括所述N个SRS资源中的一个或多个SRS资源;K、N为正整数,K≤N;A processing unit, configured to obtain K SRS resource subsets according to the N SRS resources used when the terminal device sends the sounding reference signal SRS; each SRS resource subset of the K SRS resource subsets includes the N SRS resources One or more SRS resources in; K, N are positive integers, K≤N;
    收发单元,用于向终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息中包括探测参考信号资源标识SRI指示域,所述SRI指示域包括至少一个子部分,所述SRI指示域通过指示目标SRS资源,令所述终端设备确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH传输所使用的预编码;所述目标SRS资源为所述N个SRS资源中的一个或多个;以及,接收所述终端设备使用所述预编码进行所述PUSCH传输的上行数据。A transceiver unit, configured to send first information to a terminal device, where the first information includes a sounding reference signal resource identifier SRI indication field, the SRI indication field includes at least one sub-part, and the SRI indication field indicates a target SRS resource by indicating a target SRS resource. , let the terminal equipment determine the precoding used for physical uplink shared channel PUSCH transmission; the target SRS resource is one or more of the N SRS resources; and, receive the terminal equipment using the precoding Uplink data for the PUSCH transmission.
  25. 一种信息指示装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口用于接收来自所述信息指示装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述信息指示装置之外的其它通信装置,所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如权利要求1至10中任一项、或11至18中任一项所述的方法。An information indicating device, characterized in that it includes a processor and a communication interface, and the communication interface is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the information indicating device and transmit them to the processor or transfer signals from the information indicating device. The signal of the processor is sent to other communication devices than the information indicating device, and the processor is used to implement any one of claims 1 to 10 or any one of 11 to 18 through logic circuits or executing code instructions method described in item.
  26. 一种信息指示装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器相连,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置执行如权利要求1至10中任一项、或11至18中任一项所述的方法。An information indicating device, characterized in that it includes a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for executing the computer program stored in the memory, so that the The apparatus performs the method of any one of claims 1 to 10, or any one of 11 to 18.
  27. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被运行时,实现如权利要求1至10中任一项、或11至18中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, any one of claims 1 to 10 or 11 to 18 is implemented. The method of any one.
  28. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括处理器和接口;A chip, characterized in that it includes a processor and an interface;
    所述处理器用于通过所述接口读取指令以执行权利要求1至10中任一项、或11至18 中任一项所述的信息指示方法。The processor is configured to read an instruction through the interface to execute the information indicating method of any one of claims 1 to 10 or any one of claims 11 to 18.
  29. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,实现如权利要求1至10中任一项、或11至18中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, the computer program product includes a computer program or instruction, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by a communication device, realizes any one of claims 1 to 10, or 11 to 18 The method of any of the above.
  30. 一种信息指示系统,其特征在于,包括权利要求19-23任意一项所述的信息指示装置、以及权利要求24所述的信息指示装置。An information indicating system, characterized by comprising the information indicating device according to any one of claims 19-23 and the information indicating device according to claim 24 .
PCT/CN2020/110920 2020-08-24 2020-08-24 Information indication method and apparatus WO2022040890A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/110920 WO2022040890A1 (en) 2020-08-24 2020-08-24 Information indication method and apparatus
CN202080103452.6A CN115989704A (en) 2020-08-24 2020-08-24 Information indication method and device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/110920 WO2022040890A1 (en) 2020-08-24 2020-08-24 Information indication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022040890A1 true WO2022040890A1 (en) 2022-03-03

Family

ID=80354375

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/110920 WO2022040890A1 (en) 2020-08-24 2020-08-24 Information indication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115989704A (en)
WO (1) WO2022040890A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023201542A1 (en) * 2022-04-19 2023-10-26 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Transmission parameter determining method and apparatus, terminal device and network device
WO2024031718A1 (en) * 2022-08-12 2024-02-15 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Precoding indication method and apparatus for non-codebook-based pusch transmission supportive of 8tx

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102469609A (en) * 2010-11-16 2012-05-23 华为技术有限公司 Sending method for SRS (Sounding Reference Signal), configuration indicating method and device
WO2020101780A2 (en) * 2019-08-16 2020-05-22 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Methods and apparatus for signaling control information
CN111226481A (en) * 2018-09-27 2020-06-02 联发科技股份有限公司 Quasi-co-location architecture enhancement for multiple transmit-receive point operation
CN111294100A (en) * 2017-12-28 2020-06-16 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method, terminal equipment and network equipment for uplink data transmission

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102469609A (en) * 2010-11-16 2012-05-23 华为技术有限公司 Sending method for SRS (Sounding Reference Signal), configuration indicating method and device
CN111294100A (en) * 2017-12-28 2020-06-16 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method, terminal equipment and network equipment for uplink data transmission
CN111226481A (en) * 2018-09-27 2020-06-02 联发科技股份有限公司 Quasi-co-location architecture enhancement for multiple transmit-receive point operation
WO2020101780A2 (en) * 2019-08-16 2020-05-22 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Methods and apparatus for signaling control information

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023201542A1 (en) * 2022-04-19 2023-10-26 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Transmission parameter determining method and apparatus, terminal device and network device
WO2024031718A1 (en) * 2022-08-12 2024-02-15 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Precoding indication method and apparatus for non-codebook-based pusch transmission supportive of 8tx

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115989704A (en) 2023-04-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11283503B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
CN110536456B (en) Communication method, terminal equipment and network equipment
WO2020164601A1 (en) Transmission configuration index state indication method, and communication apparatus
WO2020156103A1 (en) Information feedback method and device
WO2021259180A1 (en) Measurement reporting method and apparatus
WO2018126794A1 (en) Resource indication method, device and system
US11652523B2 (en) Beam training method and communications apparatus
WO2020134944A1 (en) Interference measurement method and communication apparatus
CN114451043A (en) Data transmission method and device
US20220286251A1 (en) Method for transmitting srs and terminal therefor
US11101866B2 (en) Rank indication reporting method and apparatus, and indication method and apparatus
WO2020029942A1 (en) Beam measurement method and device
JP2019511883A (en) Method and apparatus for precoding matrix indicator feedback
WO2020108637A1 (en) Channel sounding configuration method and apparatus
WO2022040890A1 (en) Information indication method and apparatus
JP2022530973A (en) Precoding matrix display and determination method, and communication equipment
TW201906445A (en) Beam management method, network device and terminal
EP4178294A1 (en) Method and apparatus for beam training
WO2019137445A1 (en) Channel state information measurement method and apparatus
EP3547562A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and system
US20230217286A1 (en) Beam generation method and related apparatus
WO2018039860A1 (en) Channel quality measurement and feedback method and apparatus
JP7371270B2 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication device
CN115211050B (en) Data transmission method and device
WO2022193260A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20950565

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20950565

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1